(make_string): Fix previous change. Be sure to make
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
d9c9b920 1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2000-10-12
424d8b44 2Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
3787e12e 6For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
f4988be7
GM
11** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
12
424d8b44
DL
13** Support for LynxOS has been added.
14
1fa28578
GM
15** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
16the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
17
18** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
19images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
20to list them.
6344985d 21
d5483ab1 22** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
d874e913 23Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
24
25** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
26Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
27
28** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
60dd7e0e 29support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the
8628686a
DL
30maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to
31build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any
32necessary changes to unexec.
f4988be7 33
d9c9b920
DL
34** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the
35new display features described below.
36
e90813b8 37** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement
a7c13351 38all of the new display features described below. The port currently
e90813b8 39lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support.
d9c9b920 40
1fa28578
GM
41\f
42* Changes in Emacs 21.1
43
4104194e
GM
44** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will
45be added to the end of the buffer because of `require-final-newline'.
46
c6f01e00
MB
47** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el.
48To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the
49`auto-compression-mode' command.
50
4c724b32
DL
51** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for
52`browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME.
53
b856f39c 54+++
068127d6
GM
55** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now
56operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode.
57
fd06c7da
MB
58** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs header-line
59(which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window), so that it
60remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled. This behavior
61may be disabled by customizing the option `Info-use-header-line'.
62
8ac08dea 63+++
62c273d7
DL
64** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It
65is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia.
66
67+++
68** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor
69mode `iswitchb-mode'.
70
8ac08dea 71+++
f393cf90
DL
72** Gnus changes.
73
74The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
75four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
76internationalization and mail-fetching.
77
78*** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
79many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
80
81If you used procmail like in
82
83(setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
84(setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
85(setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
86(setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
87
327652be 88this now has changed to
f393cf90
DL
89
90(setq mail-sources
91 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
92 :suffix ".in")))
93
94More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
95Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
96
97*** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
98Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
4301cf66
DL
99Separate MIME packages like RMIME, SEMI, mime-compose etc., will
100probably no longer work; remove them and use the native facilities.
f393cf90 101
60dd7e0e 102*** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many
4301cf66
DL
103parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There
104are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is
105now just a compatibility layer.
f393cf90
DL
106
107*** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
108called to position point.
109
110*** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
111summary buffers and NOV files.
112
113*** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
114of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
115
116*** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
117subtly different manner.
118
119*** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
120and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
121ever-changing layouts.
122
123*** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
124
125*** There is image support.
126
127** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
d1e68bce
DL
1288859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
129more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
130empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
131window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
132on.
133
ba9eeda1
GM
134** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
135set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
136file that is already visited under a different name.
137
42ac0ae5
GM
138** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
139nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
140
141** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
142recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
143signaled.
144
ba9eeda1 145** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
dab96841
DL
146support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
147use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
148buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
149M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
150new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
151
b941a14b 152+++
ba9eeda1 153** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
eb27839a 154and displays information about that.
b941a14b 155
ba9eeda1 156** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
83b6997f
GM
157file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
158
d7b38c05 159** Polish and German translations of Emacs' reference card have been
6917e6bb 160added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex' and `de-refcard.tex'.
d7b38c05
GM
161Postscript files are included.
162
163** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
164`dired-ref.tex'.
165
25ad1371
GM
166** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
167expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
168
169This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
170determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
171mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
172interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
173regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
174associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
175
b856f39c 176+++
f0298744
DL
177** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
178displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
179menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
180menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
181
9a8d84ca
DL
182** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
183a version-dependent component.
184
d76c03ea
GM
185** The <delete> function key is now bound to `delete-char' by default.
186Note that this takes effect only on window systems. On TTYs, Emacs
187will receive ASCII 127 when the DEL key is pressed. This
188character is still bound as before.
189
3b4fa1b2
DL
190** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
191using that menu.
192
40e857ea 193** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
424d8b44 194suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
40e857ea 195
beb2eb00 196+++
c08398de
DL
197** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
198buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
199contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
200by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
201insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
202the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
203Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
204
db7a3ede 205+++
3d6cd763
GM
206** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
207coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
208escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
209such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
210recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 211always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 212read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
213(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
214RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 215
0b8a3a6d
DL
216** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
217environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
218
424d8b44 219+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
220** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
221point in a pop-up window.
222
6d35b49f 223+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
224** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
225displays all characters in that character set.
226
227** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
228coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
229
a4067978 230+++
5cb6a58e 231** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
a4067978 232on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
a5e350c9
SM
233defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region
234commenting with the variable `comment-style'.
5cb6a58e 235
424d8b44 236+++
a1b8d58b
GM
237** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
238
6e417ca5
DL
239** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
240been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
241
424d8b44 242+++
5898e075
DL
243** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
244`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
245indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
246indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
247
424d8b44 248+++
abfcc168
GM
249** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
250sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 251(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
252You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
253
424d8b44 254+++
cc181e95
GM
255** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
256on the display using several methods
257
424d8b44 258+++
cc181e95
GM
259- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
260a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
261be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
262
424d8b44 263+++
cc181e95
GM
264- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
265equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter.
266
da4496b6 267- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
268
269- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
270the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
271
424d8b44 272+++
3b4fa1b2 273** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 274an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 275command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 276does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 277
424d8b44 278+++
176256a1 279** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
280`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
281typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 282
dd0add8e
DL
283** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
284characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
285
bf3ba9ac 286+++
699238d9
GM
287** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
288compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
289this behavior.
290
291The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
292compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
293Emacs dump core.
294
424d8b44 295+++
699238d9 296** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 297
7233c5bd
GM
298*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
299whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
300is useful for debugging X problems.
301
302Example:
303
699238d9 304 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 305
100b3cbb
GM
306*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
307visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
308the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
309and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
310visual class names are
311
312 TrueColor
313 PseudoColor
314 DirectColor
315 StaticColor
316 GrayScale
317 StaticGray
318
319Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
320`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
321meaning.
322
323The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
324supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
325`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
326visual.
327
328Example:
329
699238d9 330 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
331
332*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
333specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
334default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
335resource values are `true' or `on'.
336
337Example:
338
699238d9 339 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 340
0d0c76b8
EZ
341** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
342more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
343now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
344
42088c12 345** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 346display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
347shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
348be customized.
c60ea02e 349
424d8b44 350+++
31047e0d
DL
351** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
352
424d8b44 353+++
b02786f9
GM
354** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
355all frames except the selected one.
356
3261c1d8
DL
357** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
358to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
359
ffe36136 360** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
361the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
362MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
363displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
364
0292b49f 365+++
aa78a4f3
EZ
366** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
367MS-DOS version of Emacs.
ffe36136 368
559cee90
DL
369** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
370read mail from the menu etc.
371
480b5773 372+++
271b4185
GM
373** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
374a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
375
0daee095
GM
376** Changes in Texinfo mode.
377
a5e350c9 378*** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
0daee095
GM
379macros
380
381 Key binding Macro
382 -------------------------
383 C-c C-c C-s @strong
384 C-c C-c C-e @emph
a5e350c9 385 C-c C-c u @url
0daee095 386 C-c C-c q @quotation
a5e350c9
SM
387 C-c C-c m @email
388 C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block>
389 M-RET @item
390
391*** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context.
0daee095 392
559cee90
DL
393** Changes in Outline mode.
394
395There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
396`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
397the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
398
327652be 399** Changes to Emacs Server
7a912f63 400
c0a8c108
EZ
401+++
402*** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
7a912f63
GM
403with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
404are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
405Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
406buffers to kill, as before.
407
408Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
c0a8c108 409i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
7a912f63
GM
410this way.
411
956777b3
GM
412** Changes to Show Paren mode.
413
414*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
415The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
416use. Default is 1000.
417
f6989277 418+++
404fa7d6
DL
419** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
420groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
421
424d8b44
DL
422+++
423** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
424M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
425M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
426buffers.
8964fec7 427
424d8b44 428+++
39783d73
WP
429** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
430under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
431.emacs file.
432
433The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
434determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
435
d35fce81
GM
436** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
437abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
438`directory-abbrev-alist'.
439
a933dad1
DL
440** Faces and frame parameters.
441
442There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
443Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
444`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
445`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
446sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
447for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
448parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
449
450Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
451`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 452`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
453`default' face and vice versa.
454
d80061fa 455+++
f77a4a8a
GM
456** New face `menu'.
457
458The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
459Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
460attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
461
424d8b44 462+++
a933dad1
DL
463** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
464
465The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
466colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
467correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
468the screen gamma of a frame's display.
469
470PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
471in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
472color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
473
474The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
475`ScreenGamma'.
476
477** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
478
479The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
480Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
481oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
482of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
483the text.
484
485** Emacs has a new face implementation.
486
487The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
488font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
489height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
490These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
491specify a font.
492
493Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
494These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
495under Lisp changes, below.
496
497** New default font is Courier 12pt.
498
424d8b44
DL
499+++
500** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
501of its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid;
502otherwise, it is hollow.
a933dad1
DL
503
504** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
505truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
506foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
507customizing face `fringe'.
508
509** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
510can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
511
512** LessTif support.
513
424d8b44
DL
514Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see <http://www.lesstif.org>).
515You will need a version 0.88.1 or later.
a933dad1
DL
516
517** Toolkit scroll bars.
518
519Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
520LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
521configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
522bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
523bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
524Emacs.
525
526When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
527Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
528Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
529Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
530define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
531`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
532
533Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
534a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
535directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
536different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
537system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
538add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
539
540The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
541`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
542This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
543image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
544Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
545
546** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
547
548When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
549widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
550Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
551
424d8b44 552+++
a933dad1
DL
553** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
554
555When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
556whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
557defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
558highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
559displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
560whitespace.
561
6e612d4d 562+++
a933dad1
DL
563** Busy-cursor.
564
565Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
566display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
567
424d8b44 568+++
a933dad1
DL
569** Blinking cursor
570
571M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
572terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
573and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
574the group `cursor'.
575
8ac08dea 576+++
a933dad1
DL
577** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
578
579This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
580generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
581See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
582details.
583
584Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
585have to do anything to activate it.
586
587** Tabs and variable-width text.
588
589Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
590defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
591independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
592Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
593
594** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
595
424d8b44 596+++
a933dad1
DL
597*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
598
599 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
600
79dd1637
RS
601The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
602LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 603
79dd1637
RS
604*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
605LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1 606
34d90e29 607+++
a933dad1
DL
608** Hscrolling in C code.
609
cc181e95
GM
610Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
611`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
612customized.
a933dad1 613
8ac08dea 614+++
a933dad1
DL
615** Tool bar support.
616
617Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
d9c9b920
DL
618of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level
619changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is
8628686a
DL
620displayed and is on by default. To make the tool bar more useful, we
621need contributions of extra icons for specific modes (with copyright
622assignments).
a933dad1 623
424d8b44 624+++
a933dad1
DL
625** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
626
627Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
628mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
629line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
630about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
631in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
632
633Currently, the following actions have been defined:
634
635- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
636buffers.
637
638- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
639M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
640
641- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
642
424d8b44
DL
643- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
644`*') toggles the status.
a933dad1
DL
645
646- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
647
648** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
649
650When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 651from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
652non-nil.
653
654** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
655
656Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
657Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
658the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
659italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
660Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
661attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
662on terminals.
a933dad1 663
54a9404d
EZ
664The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now
665supported on character terminals.
666
a933dad1
DL
667** Sound support
668
2f516940 669Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 670driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 671supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1 672
424d8b44 673+++
a933dad1
DL
674** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
675the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
676forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
677value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
678users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
679even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
680
681The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
682
0e18b431 683+++
a933dad1
DL
684** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
685
686As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
687drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
688`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
689
fdd8bb68 690+++
a933dad1
DL
691** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
692bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
693
694This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
695`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
696variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
697
c5d00c64 698+++
a933dad1
DL
699** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
700
701When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
702value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
703number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 704fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
a933dad1
DL
705
706When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
707value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
708number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 709fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
a933dad1
DL
710
711** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
712notably at the end of lines.
713
714All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
715spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
716
424d8b44 717+++
eee54b0e
DL
718There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
719
a933dad1
DL
720** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
721query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
722after each match to get the replacement text.
723
00782214 724+++
d5483ab1
GM
725** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
726you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0 727
424d8b44 728** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets
4ff40dd0
GM
729you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
730lisp-complete-symbol.
731
7af69644 732+++
a933dad1
DL
733** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
734
163ea954 735If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
a299a6f0
GM
736longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it
737is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum
738minibuffer window size by setting the following variables:
a933dad1
DL
739
740- User option: max-mini-window-height
741
742Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
743fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
a299a6f0 744specifies a number of lines.
a933dad1
DL
745
746Default is 0.25.
747
a299a6f0
GM
748- User option: resize-mini-windows
749
750How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always
751resize ot fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows
752grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk
753again.
754
755Default is `grow-only'.
756
2f72fd2f
GM
757** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
758
0d43b60d
GM
759** Changes to hideshow.el
760
761Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
327652be
TTN
762selection and traversal, includes more isearch support, and has more
763conventional keybindings.
0d43b60d
GM
764
765*** Generalized block selection and traversal
766
767A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
768(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
769which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
770`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
771point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
772(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
773
774If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
775i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
776backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
777the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
778
779*** Isearch support for updating mode line
780
781During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
782blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
783line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
784portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
785is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
786
787To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
788something like this in your .emacs.
789
790 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
791 (lambda ()
792 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
793
327652be
TTN
794*** New customization var: `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function'
795
796Normally, `hs-hide-all' hides everything, leaving only the
797header lines of top-level forms (and comments, unless var
798`hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is non-nil). It does this by
799moving point to each top-level block beginning and hiding the
800block there. In some major modes (for example, Java), this
801behavior results in few blocks left visible, which may not be so
802useful.
803
804You can now set var `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' to a
805function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead
806of the normal block-hiding function. For example, the following
807code defines a function to hide one level down and move point
808appropriately, and then tells hideshow to use the new function.
809
810(defun ttn-hs-hide-level-1 ()
811 (hs-hide-level 1)
812 (forward-sexp 1))
813(setq hs-hide-all-non-comment-function 'ttn-hs-hide-level-1)
814
815The name `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' was chosen to
816emphasize that this function is not called for comment blocks,
817only for code blocks.
818
819*** Command deleted: `hs-show-region'
820
821Historical Note: This command was added to handle "unbalanced
822parentheses" emergencies back when hideshow.el used selective
823display for implementation.
824
825*** Commands rebound to more conventional keys
826
827The hideshow commands used to be bound to keys of the form "C-c
828LETTER". This is contrary to the Emacs keybinding convention,
829which reserves that space for user modification. Here are the
830new bindings (which includes the addition of `hs-toggle-hiding'):
831
832 hs-hide-block C-c C-h
833 hs-show-block C-c C-s
834 hs-hide-all C-c C-M-h
835 hs-show-all C-c C-M-s
836 hs-hide-level C-c C-l
837 hs-toggle-hiding C-c C-c
838 hs-mouse-toggle-hiding [(shift button-2)]
839
840These were chosen to roughly imitate those used by Outline mode.
841
559cee90
DL
842** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
843
424d8b44 844+++
1b24b888
GM
845*** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
846an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
559cee90
DL
847log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
848
424d8b44 849+++
1b24b888
GM
850**** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
851current buffer.
424d8b44
DL
852
853+++
1b24b888
GM
854*** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
855in a log file.
eb2aac9d 856
502004be 857+++
1b24b888
GM
858*** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
859entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
eb2aac9d 860
502004be 861+++
1b24b888 862*** Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
424d8b44
DL
863version number is performed based on regular expressions from
864`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be cutomized.
865Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
eb2aac9d 866
2c63c979 867*** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting.
1b24b888 868
79c78e77
GM
869** Changes to cmuscheme
870
871*** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed
872`cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el.
873
3476b54a
GM
874** Changes in Font Lock
875
876*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
a5e350c9 877font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode.
3476b54a 878
2c63c979
SM
879*** multiline patterns are now supported.
880
a5e350c9
SM
881*** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose
882the face used for each string/comment.
883
b3b98592
GM
884** Comint (subshell) changes
885
988cded7
MB
886These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which
887include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc.
888
889*** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp'
890to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which
891parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the
892user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use
893this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line,
894respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this
895feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option
896`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'.
897
898*** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
b3b98592
GM
899and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
900
988cded7 901*** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
b3b98592
GM
902buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
903buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
904
905The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
906M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
907the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
908
988cded7
MB
909*** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts,
910and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features,
911see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
31fc5d15 912
988cded7 913*** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s')
d648cc45
MB
914saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix
915argument, it appends to the file.
916
988cded7 917*** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output'
d648cc45
MB
918(usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for
919compatibility.
920
0e40b809
EL
921*** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input
922ring (history).
d648cc45 923
e26cec67
GM
924** Changes to Rmail mode
925
c0510d27
GM
926*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
927set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
928receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
929recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
930`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
931as correspondent.
932
933Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
934mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 935regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 936
3b55acc9
GM
937*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
938to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
939Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
940with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
941for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
942
6a1950ec
GM
943*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
944like `j'.
945
5bb6f079
RS
946*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
947specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 948digest message.
e26cec67 949
993d8b7d
DL
950*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
951in which folder to put messages automatically.
952
400a1ed0
GM
953** Changes to TeX mode
954
a5e350c9 955*** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
400a1ed0
GM
956`latex-mode'.
957
a5e350c9
SM
958*** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm.
959
960*** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs.
961
962*** Added support for outline-minor-mode.
963
a933dad1
DL
964** Changes to RefTeX mode
965
966*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
967 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
968 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
969 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
970 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
971 can be edited from that buffer.
972
973*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
974 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
975 `A' to use all marked entries).
976
977*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
978 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
979
980*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
981 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
982 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
983 been cited.
984
38de9631
GM
985** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
986The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
987semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
988in column 1 are always made leaves.
989
a933dad1
DL
990** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
991has the following new features:
992
993*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
994may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
995to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
996time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
997
998*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
999feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
1000file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
1001compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
1002pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
1003defaults to 1.
1004
5d94f558 1005** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
b675095c
GM
1006file names.
1007
424d8b44 1008+++
a933dad1
DL
1009** Tooltips.
1010
1011Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
1012mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
1013can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
1014
1015Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
1016variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
1017the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
1018tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
1019
424d8b44 1020+++
a933dad1
DL
1021** Customize changes
1022
1023*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
1024`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
1025cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
1026
1027*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
1028Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
1029default).
1030
0ae51efb
GM
1031*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
1032between custom options. Example:
1033
1034 (defcustom default-input-method nil
1035 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
1036 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
1037 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
1038 :group 'mule
1039 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
1040 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
1041
1042This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
1043current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
1044first in a custom-set-variables statement.
1045
a933dad1
DL
1046** New features in evaluation commands
1047
5e03eb84 1048*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
1049modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
1050print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
1051customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
1052eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
1053
5e03eb84
GM
1054*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
1055code when called with a prefix argument.
1056
ead53494
GM
1057** Ispell changes
1058
37d8a691 1059+++
bbe15990
EZ
1060*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
1061transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
ead53494
GM
1062spell-checks the current buffer.
1063
37d8a691 1064+++
385ff9e3
GM
1065*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
1066added.
1067
1068*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
1069correction is made and re-checked.
1070
74ec6045 1071*** An Italian and a Portuguese dictionary definition has been added.
385ff9e3
GM
1072
1073*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
1074cases.
1075
1076*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
1077on syntax errors.
1078
1079*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
1080end of the buffer.
1081
a933dad1
DL
1082** Dired changes
1083
1084*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
1085command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
1086is, delete only empty directories.
1087
1088*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
1089command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
1090copy directories recursively.
1091
f6737cde
GM
1092*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
1093in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
1094the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
1095
2f72fd2f
GM
1096*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
1097replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
1098directory.
1099
7381ae05
MB
1100*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
1101a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
1102This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
1103will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
1104accurate or inaccurate as it is.
1105
e024b101
GM
1106*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
1107from ls switches.
1108
60b392a7
MB
1109*** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use
1110of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename,
1111which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single
1112source file, not when operating on multiple marked files.
1113
a933dad1
DL
1114** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
1115use the -f option when sending mail.
1116
b1c609b1
GM
1117** CC mode changes.
1118
1119Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
1120current user setups (although it's believed that these
1121incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
1122However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
1123back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
1124compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
1125release.
1126
7972fcfc
GM
1127*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
1128This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
1129of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
1130non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
1131want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
1132have to bother.
1133
1134Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
1135situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 1136and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
1137If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
1138the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
1139by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
1140
b1c609b1
GM
1141*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
1142When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
1143variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
1144take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
1145is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
1146settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
1147possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
1148Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
1149
1150By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
1151special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
1152the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
1153of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
1154above.
1155
1156Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
1157when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
1158function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
1159call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
1160then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
1161values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
1162only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
1163function documentation for more info.
1164
1165The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
1166especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
1167with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
1168intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
1169such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
1170is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
1171configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
1172global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
1173
1174(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
1175
1176**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
1177This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
1178
1179This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
1180variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
1181completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
1182the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
1183empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
1184style system.
1185
1186**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
1187In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
1188c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
1189as far as possible.
1190
1191*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
1192CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
1193surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
1194chapter about this in the manual.
1195
1196**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
1197The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
1198recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
1199primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
1200adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
1201
1202**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
1203This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
1204c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
1205
1206**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
1207This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
1208
1209It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
1210Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
1211A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
1212inside CC Mode.
1213
1214Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
1215causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
1216the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
1217available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
1218cc-mode/).
1219
1220**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
1221The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
1222specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
1223literals.
1224
1225**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
1226It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
1227prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
1228you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
1229this function.
1230
1231*** Fixes to IDL mode.
1232It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
1233to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
1234struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
1235Thanks to Eric Eide.
1236
1237*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1238It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1239opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1240
1241**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1242
1243*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1244See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1245better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1246and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1247
1248*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1249previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1250the column specified by comment-column.
1251
1252*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1253In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1254is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1255prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1256contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1257don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1258
1259*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1260instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1261arguments.
1262
1263*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1264
1265*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1266c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1267c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1268variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1269Provan).
1270
1271*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1272
c407c570
GM
1273** Makefile mode changes
1274
1275*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1276
5d94f558 1277*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
c407c570
GM
1278Fontlock mode is active.
1279
87be76f6
GM
1280** Isearch changes
1281
3353ef5a
GM
1282*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1283so that searches can be resumed.
1284
1285*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
1286respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1287that started the search.
1288
87be76f6 1289*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
1290selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1291
c8a8458a 1292+++
87be76f6
GM
1293*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1294
d35fce81 1295Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
1296`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1297search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1298before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1299highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
5d94f558 1300`secondary-selection'.
87be76f6
GM
1301
1302The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1303will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1304Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1305using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1306usual snappy response.
1307
1308If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1309matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1310set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1311isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1312
21bc6203 1313+++
35384f06
GM
1314** Changes in sort.el
1315
1316The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 1317as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
21bc6203 1318new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
35384f06 1319numeric base.
87be76f6 1320
d7b511c4
GM
1321** Changes to Ange-ftp
1322
424d8b44 1323+++
d7b511c4 1324*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
1325names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1326sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1327
d7b511c4
GM
1328*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1329ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1330
9d453139
SS
1331*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1332output ^M at the end of lines.
1333
4b9347b3
GM
1334** Shell script mode changes.
1335
1336Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
1337derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
1338sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1339
79214ddf
FP
1340** Etags changes.
1341
1342*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1343
aca0be23 1344*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
1345possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1346{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1347This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1348a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 1349
79214ddf
FP
1350*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1351declarations when given the --declarations option.
1352
1353*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 1354"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
1355
1356*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1357types.
1358
de370c4c 1359*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1360
1361*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1362
1363*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1364are now tagged.
1365
1366*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1367variables are tagged.
1368
1369*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1370
8dc78b52
FP
1371*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1372for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1373
c8d94f86 1374+++
f6737cde
GM
1375** Changes in etags.el
1376
3f6e4b8b
GM
1377*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1378tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1379is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1380
f6737cde
GM
1381*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1382the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1383
1384If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1385FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1386TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1387obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1388
1389TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1390
1391FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1392List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1393
1394A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1395
1396 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1397 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1398 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1399
1400*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1401of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1402
1403*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1404names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1405
424d8b44 1406+++
fbc164de
PE
1407** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1408and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1409LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1410
c3eb1f10 1411+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
1412** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1413Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
14148859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
f6499c03
DL
1415GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet; there are basic 8859-14 and
14168859-15 fonts at <URL:http://czyborra.com/charsets/> and recent X
1417releases have 8859-15. There are new Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix
1418(only) and Polish slash input methods in Leim.
59c1bf85 1419
424d8b44 1420+++
163ea954 1421** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1422remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1423appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1424
1425** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1426
424d8b44 1427+++
6f8ea2ae
DL
1428** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1429
6ab8d72d 1430+++
f6499c03 1431** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
c0510d27
GM
1432containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1433expression from that list, are not checked.
1434
5d94f558
SS
1435** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1436When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1437and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1438the buffer, just like for the local files.
1439
dc28878c
GM
1440** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1441
df8a9f78 1442+++
95931eb1
GM
1443** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
1444displays local abbrevs, only.
1445
54baed30
GM
1446** VC Changes
1447
1448VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
1449easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
1450Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
1451to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
1452changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
1453`vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of atoms that identify
1454version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
1455each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
1456file is registered in that backend.
1457
1458When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
1459backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
1460directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
1461master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
1462the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
1463As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
1464
1465The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
1466still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
1467RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
1468vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
1469where it doesn't make sense.)
1470
1471The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
1472obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
1473`CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
1474
1475*** General Changes
1476
1477The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
1478checks are always done now.
1479
327652be 1480VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
54baed30
GM
1481operations.
1482
c286608e
SM
1483`vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'.
1484`vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'.
1485`vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'.
1486
22933be8
AS
1487The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the
1488first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the
1489current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into
1490the working file (``merge news'').
1491
1492The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1493(vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work
1494downwards.
1495
1496*** Multiple Backends
1497
1498VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is
1499useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS
1500repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally
1501commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your
1502local RCS archives.
1503
1504To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example)
1505should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote''
1506backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of
1507`vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.)
1508
1509If you have a file registered in one backend already, you can register
1510it in a second one by using C-x v i (vc-register) again.
1511Alternatively, you can commit changes to another backend (say, RCS),
1512by typing C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a
1513backend name as a revision number). When using the latter approach,
1514VC registers the file in the more local backend if that hasn't already
1515happened, and commits to a branch based on the current revision number
1516from the more remote backend.
1517
1518If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to
1519another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change
1520any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to
1521pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally.
1522
1523After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your
1524changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the
1525local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry
1526buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file.
1527
54baed30
GM
1528*** Changes for CVS
1529
1530There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
1531default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
1532remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
1533by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
1534regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
1535that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
1536queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
1537
22933be8
AS
1538If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of
1539repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and
1540revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without
1541any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version
1542backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version
1543number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~
1544(vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter
1545of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other,
1546the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted
1547automatically after commit.
1548
54baed30
GM
1549If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
1550repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
1551If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
22933be8 1552commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the
54baed30
GM
1553current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
1554entire directory tree.
1555
1556The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
1557"cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
1558is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
1559"watched" by other developers.)
1560
22933be8
AS
1561The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1562(vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give
1563an empty argument to the latter, that performs a `cvs update',
1564starting at the given directory.
1565
54baed30
GM
1566*** Lisp Changes in VC
1567
1568VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
1569add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
1570library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
1571then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
1572a version system named FOO, you write a library named vc-foo.el, which
1573provides a number of functions vc-foo-... (see commentary at the end
1574of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
1575you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the atom
1576`FOO' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
1577
a933dad1
DL
1578** New modes and packages
1579
b95b34e5
GM
1580*** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines,
1581rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The
1582shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \.
1583
1584Features are:
1585
1586- Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is
1587 drawn, like this: | \ /
1588 --+-- X
1589 | / \
1590
1591- Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the
1592 result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If
1593 your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a
1594 pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will
1595 then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line
1596 you are drawing.
1597
1598- Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight)
1599 poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >.
1600
1601- Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by
1602 flood-filling.
1603
1604- Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular
1605 regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be
1606 turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in
1607 artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa.
1608
1609- Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can
1610 also do without the mouse.
1611
1612- Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to
1613 reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares
1614 and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your
1615 ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio,
1616 the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round.
1617
1618- Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented:
1619
1620 lines straight-lines
1621 rectangles squares
1622 poly-lines straight poly-lines
1623 ellipses circles
1624 text (see-thru) text (overwrite)
1625 spray-can setting size for spraying
1626 vaporize line vaporize lines
1627 erase characters erase rectangles
1628
1629 Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or
1630 diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in
1631 the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while
1632 drawing.
1633
1634 It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines
1635 (rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are
1636 straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired
1637 by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>.
1638
1639- Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this
1640 can be turned off).
1641
4473cdd9
JW
1642+++
1643*** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell
1644implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it.
1645It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp
1646functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports
1647history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It
1648will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of
1649the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been
1650rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell,
1651all within the scope of your Emacs process.
1652
ff332647 1653+++
90cbf47e
GM
1654*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1655intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1656typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1657on certain projects.
1658
894ca69e 1659+++
90cbf47e 1660*** The new package hi-lock.el, text matching interactively entered
d96d6bb0 1661regexp's can be highlighted. For example,
abb2db1c 1662
d96d6bb0 1663 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
abb2db1c
GM
1664
1665will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1666face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1667typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1668Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1669appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1670current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1671corresponding file is read.
1672
424d8b44 1673+++
d96d6bb0 1674*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
abb2db1c
GM
1675Emacs is idle.
1676
31fc5d15
GM
1677*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1678parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1679
5cb6a58e
SM
1680*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1681package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1682be more robust while offering the same functionality.
1683
424d8b44 1684+++
578979ee
GM
1685*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1686facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1687separate Texinfo file.
1688
424d8b44
DL
1689+++
1690*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1691by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1692provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1693`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
1694enter checkin log messages.
dc1178bf 1695
424d8b44 1696+++
6abca616
EZ
1697*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1698without invoking external programs.
1699
1700The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1701and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1702`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1703is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1704Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1705
1706The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1707page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1708
719e2c6e 1709+++
5e5dff44
GM
1710*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1711authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1712
1713The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1714the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1715the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1716Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1717even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1718single step.
1719
1720On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1721matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1722probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1723contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1724
424d8b44 1725+++
f7136ee8
GM
1726*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1727unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1728actually modifying content of a buffer.
1729
bbd9b566
GM
1730*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1731PostScript.
1732
1733Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1734
1735The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1736
1737 ; comment (until end of line)
1738 A non-terminal
1739 "C" terminal
1740 ?C? special
1741 $A default non-terminal
1742 $"C" default terminal
1743 $?C? default special
1744 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1745 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1746 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1747 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1748 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1749 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1750 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1751 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1752 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1753 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1754 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1755 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1756 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1757 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1758 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1759
1760Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1761
99453a38
GM
1762*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1763align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1764determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1765example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1766equal signs of assignments.
1767
424d8b44 1768+++
559cee90
DL
1769*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1770paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1771
424d8b44 1772+++
6448a6b3
GM
1773*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1774list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1775buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1776customize the package.
1777
6344985d
GM
1778*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1779
249652b1
GM
1780*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1781replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1782is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1783and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1784not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1785which answers different needs.
1786
424d8b44 1787+++
3476b54a
GM
1788*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1789suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1790expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1791course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1792reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1793to be enabled.
1794
424d8b44 1795+++
8964fec7
SM
1796*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1797containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1798
424d8b44 1799+++
a933dad1
DL
1800*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1801
424d8b44 1802+++
a933dad1
DL
1803*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1804
1805*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1806
8901d1ac
GM
1807Please note: if `ansi-color-for-shell-mode' and
1808`global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will
1809disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to
1810`comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This
1811displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground
1812and background colors.
1813
a933dad1
DL
1814*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1815Pascal) language.
1816
f6499c03 1817+++
a933dad1
DL
1818*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1819the text at point.
1820
1821*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1822
424d8b44 1823+++
8d54eb69
DL
1824*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1825
a933dad1
DL
1826*** whitespace.el ???
1827
ebcfda83
GM
1828*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1829files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1830(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1831interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1832often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1833uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1834codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1835
1836*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1837
1838Here is an example of columns:
1839
1840horse apple bus
1841dog pineapple car EXTRA
1842porcupine strawberry airplane
1843
1844Doing the following settings:
1845
1846 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1847 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1848 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1849 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1850
1851
1852Selecting the lines above and typing:
1853
1854 M-x delimit-columns-region
1855
1856It results:
1857
1858[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1859[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1860[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1861
1862delim-col has the following options:
1863
1864 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1865 before all columns.
1866
1867 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1868 between each column.
1869
1870 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1871 after all columns.
1872
1873 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1874 each column.
1875
1876delim-col has the following commands:
1877
1878 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1879 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1880
424d8b44 1881+++
f507826c 1882*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
31fc5d15
GM
1883were operated on recently.
1884
1885M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
f507826c 1886
31fc5d15
GM
1887M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
1888recentf at Emacs startup.
f507826c 1889
31fc5d15
GM
1890M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
1891filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
1892file list can be displayed:
f507826c 1893
31fc5d15
GM
1894- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
1895- sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
1896- showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 1897
31fc5d15
GM
1898The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
1899dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 1900
8062f458
DL
1901*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1902text.
1903
424d8b44 1904+++
36e24b82 1905*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1906of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1907specific to Message mode.
1908
424d8b44 1909+++
36e24b82
DL
1910*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1911viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1912with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1913
424d8b44 1914+++
aaa659ef
DL
1915*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1916interface to access directory servers using different directory
1917protocols. It has a separate manual.
1918
eee54b0e
DL
1919*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1920for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1921
424d8b44 1922+++
612839b6
GM
1923*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1924
5d94f558 1925*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
612839b6 1926minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1927
399da7e3
DL
1928*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1929with the diary features.
1930
6e417ca5
DL
1931*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1932numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1933
4a27bdfb
GM
1934*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
1935Fill mode.
1936
60dd7e0e
DL
1937*** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in
1938Gnus facilities.
1939
dace60cf
JW
1940*** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion
1941facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main
1942difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning
1943they can be profiled, debugged, etc.
a18a342d 1944
965bc065
DL
1945+++
1946** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping
1947paragraphs filled as you modify them.
1948
1949+++
1950** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files
1951to be visited as images.
1952
a933dad1
DL
1953** Withdrawn packages
1954
1955*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1956functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1957
3261c1d8
DL
1958*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1959
1960*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
1961
1962\f
1963* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
1964(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
1965
52d89894
GM
1966+++
1967** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies
1968alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font.
1969
4301cf66
DL
1970** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum",
1971currently using the `md5sum' program.
1972
6bc92b2e
GM
1973** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually
1974deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame
1975being deleted.
1976
39e776cd
SM
1977** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg.
1978
a18a342d 1979+++
1396138a 1980** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed.
a18a342d
DL
1981If a range in a regular expression or the arg of
1982skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends
1983with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is
1984C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's
1985charset.
1986
4fbdfdcf
MB
1987+++
1988** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in
1989the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the
1990message.
1991
6a0b0752
MB
1992** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an
1993expression with auto-compression-mode enabled.
1994
47e351a3
GM
1995** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
1996with the more general `:mask' property.
1997
ba9eeda1
GM
1998** Image specifications accept more `:algorithm's.
1999
a2bd77b8
GM
2000** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
2001backslash.
2002
424d8b44
DL
2003+++
2004** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
2005is running in batch mode. For example,
2006
2007 (message "%s" (read t))
2008
2009will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
2010to standard output.
2011
2012+++
2013** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
2014`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
2015
ead53494
GM
2016** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
2017will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
2018frame or window.
2019
f6499c03 2020+++
27848c01
GM
2021** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
2022were added
2023
2024- Function: remove ELT SEQ
2025
2026Return a copy of SEQ with all occurences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
2027a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
2028
2029- Function: remq ELT LIST
2030
2031Return a copy of LIST with all occurences of ELT removed. The
2032comparison is done with `eq'.
2033
2034** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
3ab82477 2035
b548072f
GM
2036** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
2037has been changed.
2038
424d8b44 2039+++
07b14857
KH
2040** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
2041without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
2042convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
2043
9662da0b
GM
2044** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
2045or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 2046
7fce7efb
DL
2047** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
2048function was declared obsolete.
2049
5d94f558 2050** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7fce7efb
DL
2051retained as an alias).
2052
f98d3086
SM
2053** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
2054It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
2055is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
2056
87efd256
GM
2057** The new function `window-list' has been defined
2058
39b39373
GM
2059- Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF
2060
2061Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or
2062omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use
2063the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window,
2064even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the
2065minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t
2066means never include the minibuffer window.
87efd256 2067
67c9a1d2
GM
2068** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
2069
2070- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
2071
2072Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
2073
2074This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
2075calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
2076argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
2077value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
2078returned.
2079
2080Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
2081if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
2082it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
2083minibuffer even if it is active.
2084
2085Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
2086counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
2087too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
2088and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
2089`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
2090entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
2091
2092ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
2093ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
2094ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
2095ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
2096ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
2097If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
2098Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
2099
ead53494
GM
2100** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
2101event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
2102argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
dce6b995 2103
25fa6deb
GM
2104** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
2105call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
2106message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
2107Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 2108
5d94f558 2109** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
2110meaning no limit.
2111
5d94f558 2112** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
c08398de
DL
2113coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
2114DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
2115
80c05bd3 2116** The function `subr-arity' provides information on the argument list
de370c4c
DL
2117of a primitive.
2118
c286608e
SM
2119** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps.
2120
80c05bd3
DL
2121** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
2122buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
2123This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
2124than replacing the local map.
2125
4bc7a543
DL
2126** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
2127after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
2128
2129** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
2130
f6499c03 2131+++
c286608e
SM
2132** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments,
2133as promised long ago.
f0298744 2134
5d94f558 2135** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
a933dad1
DL
2136\f
2137* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
2138
2139Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2140--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2141When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2142so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2143
85c75536
MB
2144*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
2145buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
2146the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
2147restriction to be restored incorrectly.
2148
0b8a3a6d
DL
2149*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
2150`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
2151when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
2152multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
2153
2154*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
2155`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
2156contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
2157
2158*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
2159changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
2160[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
2161regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
2162the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
2163extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
2164bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
2165eight-bit-graphic.
2166
2167** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
2168
2169A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
2170a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
2171character set as previously.
2172
2173*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
2174They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
2175modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
2176
2177CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
2178characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
2179range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
2180case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
2181
2182FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
2183name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
2184
2185*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
2186registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
2187"fontset-default".
2188
2189*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
2190argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
2191
2192** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
2193composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
2194buffers and strings.
2195
2196*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
2197character' which is an independent character with a unique character
2198code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
2199have been deleted: composite-char-component,
2200composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
2201composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
2202The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
2203also been deleted.
2204
2205*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
2206specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
2207`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
2208
2209*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
2210MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
2211composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
2212may differ between buffer and string text.
2213
2214*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
2215COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
2216
2217*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
2218directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
2219Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
2220`composition' from STRING.
2221
2222*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
2223a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
2224
2225*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
2226obsolete.
2227
965bc065 2228** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff',
f620908e 2229`mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' are introduced
965bc065 2230for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF, U+2500..U+33FF,
f620908e 2231U+E000..U+FFFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d
DL
2232
2233** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
2234`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
2235X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
2236
2237+++
2238** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2239are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 22400xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 2241
399da7e3 2242+++
f0124b4a
DL
2243** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
2244that offset in the file before writing.
2245
f98d3086
SM
2246** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
2247compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 2248
612839b6
GM
2249** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
2250`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
2251from which the command was issued.
2252
2253** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
2254`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
2255`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
2256additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
2257operate on.
2258
271b4185
GM
2259** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
2260to `window-buffer-height'.
2261
2262- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
2263
2264Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
2265The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
2266lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
2267
2268Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
2269respectively.
2270
2271If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
2272COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
2273
2274The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
2275obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
2276on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
2277
2278Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
2279buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
2280possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
2281is currently displayed in some window.
2282
3c30cb6e
DL
2283** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
2284argument function's results.
2285
62f20204
GM
2286** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
2287signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
2288
c0510d27 2289** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
b4da8dfa 2290header in the list of headers passed to it.
c0510d27
GM
2291
2292** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
2293ignores differences in case and text representation.
2294
2295** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
2296cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
2297as follows:
2298
2299 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
2300 nil don't display a cursor
2301 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
2302 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
2303 others display a box cursor.
2304
9a0dd3dc
GM
2305** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
2306an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
2307defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
2308set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
2309
d7b511c4 2310** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 2311specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
2312the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
2313text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
2314
2315Example:
2316
2317 (string-to-syntax "()")
2318 => (4 . 41)
2319
1fa28578
GM
2320** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
2321other than 10.
2322
2323*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
2324INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
2325
5d94f558 2326 #b1111
1fa28578 2327 => 15
5d94f558 2328 #b-1111
1fa28578
GM
2329 => -15
2330
2331*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
2332
5d94f558 2333 #o666
1fa28578
GM
2334 => 438
2335
2336*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
2337
5d94f558 2338 #xbeef
1fa28578
GM
2339 => 48815
2340
2341*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
2342
5d94f558 2343 #2R-111
1fa28578 2344 => -7
5d94f558 2345 #25rah
1fa28578
GM
2346 => 267
2347
3d4ff2dd 2348** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 2349the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
2350and isn't a string.
2351
3d4ff2dd
GM
2352** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
2353a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
2354value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
2355not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
2356
16ce590d
DL
2357+++
2358** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
2359
73825616 2360** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
2361for a regexp in a string.
2362
2363** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
2364`mouse-position-function'.
2365
723e779c
GM
2366** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
2367that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
2368
d1e103b2
GM
2369** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
2370Keywords are now always considered constants.
2371
31047e0d
DL
2372+++
2373** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
2374returns it.
2375
7a85e4df
GM
2376** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
2377returned by function `recent-keys'.
2378
02b14400
RS
2379+++
2380** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
2381can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
2382Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
2383etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
2384mode.
404fa7d6 2385
02b14400 2386+++
8964fec7
SM
2387** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
2388and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
2389
02b14400
RS
2390+++
2391** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
2392has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
2393function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
2394returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
2395been performed."
2396
2397When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
2398and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
2399hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
2400then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 2401
02b14400 2402+++
81da8b32
GM
2403** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
2404In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
2405and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
2406
02b14400 2407+++
9e207b90
GM
2408** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
2409with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
2410specified table.
2411
2412 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
2413
2414Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
2415TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
2416saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
2417what BODY returns.
9e207b90 2418
02b14400 2419+++
d7f89643 2420** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 2421Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8964fec7 2422
02b14400 2423+++
dde9e75a
GM
2424** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
2425removed since it wasn't used by anything.
2426
02b14400 2427+++
9da30515
GM
2428** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
2429instead of being optional.
2430
02b14400 2431+++
d20679eb
GM
2432** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
2433modify read-only text.
2434
02b14400 2435+++
fbc164de
PE
2436** New functions and variables for locales.
2437
2438The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
2439decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
2440time functions like strftime. The new variables
2441`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
2442locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
2443
2444The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
2445environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
2446the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
2447environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
2448not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
2449`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
2450`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 2451
02b14400 2452+++
863476d1
SM
2453** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
2454To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
2455modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
2456start sequences.
2457
02b14400 2458+++
ef6d912c
GM
2459** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
2460because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
2461
02b14400 2462+++
a933dad1
DL
2463** New function `propertize'
2464
2465The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
2466strings with text properties.
2467
2468- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
2469
2470Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
2471by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
2472PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
2473specified value of that property. Example:
2474
2475 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
2476
2477+++
2478** push and pop macros.
2479
02b14400
RS
2480Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
2481are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
2482as the place that holds the list to be changed.
2483
2484(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
2485(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
2486 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
2487
02b14400
RS
2488** New dolist and dotimes macros.
2489
6c7fd5aa
RS
2490Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
2491are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
2492
2493(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
2494 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
2495 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
2496 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2497
2498(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
2499 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
2500 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
2501 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2502
a933dad1
DL
2503+++
2504** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
2505as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
2506
2507[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
2508[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
2509[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
2510[:blank:] matches space and tab only
2511[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
2512 space, and DEL.
2513[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
2514 and DEL.
2515[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
2516 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2517 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2518[:alpha:] matches letters.
2519 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2520 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2521[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
2522[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
2523[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
2524[:punct:] matches punctuation.
2525 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2526 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
2527[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
2528[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
2529[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
2530
2531+++
2532** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
2533
2534The following functions are defined for hash tables:
2535
2536- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
2537
2538The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
2539are optional. The following arguments are defined:
2540
2541:test TEST
2542
2543TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
2544Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
2545it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
2546
2547:size SIZE
2548
2549SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
2550many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
2551
2552:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
2553
2554REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
2555full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
2556size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
25571.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
2558old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
2559
2560:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
2561
2562THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
2563hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
2564(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
2565
2566:weakness WEAK
2567
b548072f
GM
2568WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
2569`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
2570`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
2571collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
2572outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
a933dad1
DL
2573
2574- Function: makehash &optional TEST
2575
2576Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
2577
2578- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
2579
2580Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
2581
2582- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
2583
2584Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
2585values are shared.
2586
2587- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
2588
2589Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
2590
2591- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2592
2593Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
2594
2595- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
2596
2597Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
2598
2599- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2600
2601Returns the size of TABLE.
2602
d96d6bb0 2603- Function: hash-table-test TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2604
2605Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
2606
2607- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
2608
2609Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
2610
2611- Function: clrhash TABLE
2612
2613Clear TABLE.
2614
2615- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
2616
2617Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
2618not found.
2619
79214ddf 2620- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2621
2622Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
2623another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
2624
2625- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
2626
2627Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
2628
2629- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
2630
2631Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
2632arguments KEY and VALUE.
2633
2634- Function: sxhash OBJ
2635
2636Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
2637
2638- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
2639
2640Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
2641a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 2642comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
2643and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
2644of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
2645
2646TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
2647
2648HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
2649code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
2650integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
2651
2652Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
2653be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
2654
2655 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
2656 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
2657
2658 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
2659 (sxhash (upcase a)))
2660
79214ddf 2661 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
2662 'case-fold-string-hash))
2663
2664 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
2665
2666+++
2667** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
2668
2669It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
2670circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
2671a cons cell which is its own cdr.
2672
2673+++
2674** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
2675
2676If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
2677#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
2678
a933dad1
DL
2679+++
2680** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
2681t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
2682specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
2683is too short to reach that column.
2684
2685+++
2686** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
2687now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
2688after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
2689two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
2690
2691If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
2692perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
2693and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
2694
2695+++
2696** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
2697to specify which buffer to return the size of.
2698
2699+++
2700** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
2701calendar-move-hook after moving point.
2702
2703+++
2704** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
2705directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
2706small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
2707small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
2708temporary-file-directory instead.
2709
2710+++
2711** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
2712the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
2713`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
2714hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
2715
2716+++
2717** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
2718elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
2719
2720+++
2721** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
2722
2723make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
2724creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
2725ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
2726
2727+++
2728** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
2729
2730The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
2731on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
2732is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
2733never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
2734ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
2735overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
2736
2737If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
2738that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
2739to get an error if the file exists at that time.
2740The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
2741
2742+++
2743** Function `format' now handles text properties.
2744
2745Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
2746If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
2747ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
2748result string.
2749
2750Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
2751string where arguments appear in the result string.
2752
2753Example:
2754
2755 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2756 (s2 "world"))
2757 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2758 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 2759 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
2760
2761results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2762
2763+++
2764** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2765
2766Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2767The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2768argument in it.
2769
2770 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2771 (arg "world"))
2772 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2773 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2774 (message msg arg))
2775
2776+++
2777** Sound support
2778
2779Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2780(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2781
2782Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2783(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2784to enable sound support.
2785
2786Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2787list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2788when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2789functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2790sound to play, before playing the sound.
2791
2792The following sound properties are supported:
2793
2794- `:file FILE'
2795
2796FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2797searched relative to `data-directory'.
2798
6fb40beb
GM
2799- `:data DATA'
2800
2801DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2802may be present, but not both.
2803
a933dad1
DL
2804- `:volume VOLUME'
2805
2806VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
28070..1. This property is optional.
2808
2809Other properties are ignored.
2810
2811** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
2812
2813** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2814a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
2815
2816** Changes to garbage collection
2817
2818*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2819of live and free strings.
2820
2821*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2822strings that have been consed so far.
2823
a933dad1 2824\f
04545643
GM
2825* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2826Lisp Manual
2827
f7eb32aa 2828+++
a299a6f0
GM
2829** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes
2830mini-windows.
2831
2832** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third argument, FULLY.
ea4c1b7c
MB
2833If FULLY is non-nil, then locations that are partially obscured aren't
2834considered visible.
2835
a299a6f0 2836** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
82a452c8 2837
9a8d84ca
DL
2838+++
2839** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2
GM
2840
2841** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
2842image.
2843
2844- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
2845
2846Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
2847
2848SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
2849measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
2850character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
2851font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
2852FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
2853
ebb8f116
GM
2854** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
2855has a mask bitmap.
2856
2857- Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
2858
2859Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
2860FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
2861or omitted means use the selected frame.
2862
f6499c03 2863+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
2864** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
2865satisfying one of a list of specifications.
2866
2867+++
2868** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
2869optional.
2870
f6499c03
DL
2871+++
2872** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
2873below).
04545643
GM
2874
2875\f
a933dad1
DL
2876* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
2877
2878Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2879--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2880When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2881so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2882
f6d3257b
GM
2883** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
2884to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
2885
2886Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
2887text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
2888is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
2889your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
2890laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
2891just display it black instead.
2892
2893This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
2894a line like
2895
2896 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
2897
2898in your `.emacs'.
2899
a933dad1
DL
2900** New face implementation.
2901
2902Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
2903font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
2904
2905+++
2906*** New faces.
2907
2908Each face can specify the following display attributes:
2909
2910 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 2911
a933dad1
DL
2912 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
2913 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 2914
a933dad1 2915 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 2916
a933dad1 2917 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 2918
a933dad1 2919 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 2920
a933dad1 2921 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 2922
a933dad1
DL
2923 7. Background color.
2924
2925 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
2926
2927 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
2928
2929 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
2930
2931 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2932
2933 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2934 color.
2935
2936 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
2937 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
2938
2939Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
2940same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
2941frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
2942faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
2943with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
2944attributes mentioned above.
2945
2946There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
2947definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
2948created frames.
79214ddf 2949
a933dad1
DL
2950A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
2951have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
2952`fully-specified'.
2953
2954+++
2955*** Face merging.
2956
2957The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
2958combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
2959aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
2960properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
2961that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
2962results in a fully-specified face.
2963
2964+++
2965*** Face realization.
2966
2967After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
2968merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
2969realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
2970available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
2971face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
2972cache of the frame on which it was realized.
2973
2974Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
2975character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
2976for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
2977charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
2978
2979Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
2980specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
2981being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
2982the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
2983statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
2984
2985In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
2986`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
29870x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
2988the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
2989initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
2990Emacs.
2991
2992Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
2993`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
2994registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
2995with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
2996
a7c13351 2997+++
a933dad1
DL
2998**** Clearing face caches.
2999
3000The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
3001on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
3002unused fonts.
3003
3004+++
3005*** Font selection.
79214ddf 3006
a933dad1
DL
3007Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
3008given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
3009for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
3010
3011If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
3012pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
3013family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
3014property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
3015an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
3016
3017Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
3018against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
3019match for the given face attributes in this font list.
3020
3021Font selection can be influenced by the user.
3022
3023The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
3024attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
3025face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
3026names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
3027that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
3028width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
3029to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
3030
52d89894
GM
3031Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify
3032alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face
3033doesn't exist. Likewise, `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows to
3034specify alternative font registry names to try.
a933dad1
DL
3035
3036+++
3037**** Scalable fonts
3038
3039Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
3040since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
3041servers.
3042
3043To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 3044`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
3045scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
3046Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
3047scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
3048that list. Example:
3049
3050 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
3051
3052allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
3053
3054+++
3055*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
3056
3057- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
3058
3059Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
3060is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
3061string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
3062
3063If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
3064the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
3065FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
3066POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
3067SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
3068These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
3069if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
3070REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
3071the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
3072of the face font sort order.
3073
79214ddf 3074- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
3075
3076Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
3077omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
3078(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
3079non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
3080
3081- Variable: font-list-limit
3082
3083Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
3084won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
3085matching font. The default is currently 100.
3086
3087+++
3088*** Setting face attributes.
3089
3090For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
3091with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
3092implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
3093`face-attribute'.
3094
3095Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
3096symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
3097
3098The following attributes are recognized:
3099
3100`:family'
3101
3102VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
3103or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
3104and `?' are allowed.
3105
3106`:width'
3107
3108VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
3109It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
3110`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
3111`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
3112
3113`:height'
3114
787345ff
MB
3115VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
3116in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
3117scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
3118height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
a933dad1
DL
3119
3120`:weight'
3121
3122VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
3123symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
3124`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
3125
3126`:slant'
3127
3128VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
3129symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
3130`reverse-oblique'.
3131
3132`:foreground', `:background'
3133
3134VALUE must be a color name, a string.
3135
3136`:underline'
3137
3138VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
3139VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
3140a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
3141don't underline.
3142
3143`:overline'
3144
3145VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
3146VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
3147string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
3148overline.
3149
3150`:strike-through'
3151
3152VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
3153striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
3154face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
3155is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
3156
3157`:box'
3158
3159VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
3160around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
3161VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
3162of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
3163and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
3164VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
3165:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
3166the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
3167specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
3168defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
3169the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
3170color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
3171should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
3172like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
3173that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
3174the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
3175box.
3176
3177`:inverse-video'
3178
3179VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
3180inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
3181
3182`:stipple'
3183
3184If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
3185The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
3186searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
3187HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
3188is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
3189explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
3190
3191For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
3192and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
3193
3194`:font'
3195
3196Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
3197XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
3198is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
3199versions of Emacs.
3200
3201For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
3202be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
3203must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
3204
3205Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
3206`defface'.
3207
787345ff
MB
3208`:inherit'
3209
3210VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
3211of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
3212like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
3213
a933dad1
DL
3214*** Face attributes and X resources
3215
3216The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
3217from X resources:
3218
3219 Face attribute X resource class
3220-----------------------------------------------------------------------
3221 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
3222 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
3223 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
3224 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
3225 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
3226 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
3227 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
3228 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
3229 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
3230 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
3231 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
3232 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
3233 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 3234 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
3235 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
3236 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3237 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
3238 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
3239 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3240
3241+++
3242*** Text property `face'.
3243
3244The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
3245specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
3246specification can be
3247
32481. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
3249
32502. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
3251 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
3252 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
3253 for face attribute names.
3254
32553. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
3256 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
3257 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
3258
3259+++
3260** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
3261
acf3ecb7
EZ
3262The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
3263on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
3264the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 3265default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 3266`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
3267used to clear the mapping table.
3268
acf3ecb7
EZ
3269** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
3270
3271The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
3272and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
3273type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
3274color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
3275display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
3276old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
3277`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
3278compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
3279should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
3280modify their color-related behavior.
3281
3282The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
3283any frame type.
3284
8a5719f0
EZ
3285** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
3286
3287The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
3288`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
3289`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
3290`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
3291`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
3292`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
3293display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
3294the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
3295platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
3296
a933dad1
DL
3297+++
3298** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 3299
463cac2d 3300This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
a933dad1
DL
3301
3302The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
3303end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
3304Otherwise, it returns zero.
3305
463cac2d
GM
3306** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
3307
3308There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
3309buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
59927f88 3310property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
463cac2d 3311
9a9dfda8 3312Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 3313forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 3314to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 3315not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
3316commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
3317boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
3318`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
3319functions.
463cac2d
GM
3320
3321Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 3322a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 3323editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 3324
9a9dfda8
GM
3325The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
3326
59927f88 3327- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9a9dfda8
GM
3328
3329Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
59927f88 3330
9a9dfda8
GM
3331A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3332If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
3333constrained position if that is is different.
3334
3335If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
3336positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
3337ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
59927f88 3338constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9a9dfda8
GM
3339as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3340is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
59927f88
MB
3341fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
3342the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
3343also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9a9dfda8
GM
3344
3345If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
3346NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
3347unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
3348C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
3349only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
3350
59927f88
MB
3351If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
3352a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
3353
3354Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
3355
3356- Function: delete-field &optional POS
9a9dfda8 3357
59927f88 3358Delete the field surrounding POS.
9a9dfda8 3359A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3360If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3361
3362- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3363
3364Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
3365A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3366If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3367If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9a9dfda8
GM
3368field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
3369
3370- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3371
3372Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
3373A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3374If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3375If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9a9dfda8
GM
3376then the end of the *following* field is returned.
3377
3378- Function: field-string &optional POS
3379
3380Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
3381A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3382If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3383
3384- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
3385
3386Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
3387A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3388If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8 3389
a933dad1
DL
3390+++
3391** Image support.
3392
3393Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
3394strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
3395(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
3396replaces the display of the characters having that property.
3397
3398If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
3399`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
3400AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
3401window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
3402area.
3403
3404IMAGE is an image specification.
3405
3406*** Image specifications
3407
3408Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
3409is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
3410specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
3411symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
3412described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
3413
3414The following is a list of properties all image types share.
3415
3416`:ascent ASCENT'
3417
576da55d
GM
3418ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
3419If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5d94f558 3420to use for its ascent.
576da55d
GM
3421
3422If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
3423image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
3424
5d94f558 3425If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
04545643
GM
3426centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
3427of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
3428overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
3429
3430`:margin MARGIN'
3431
79214ddf 3432MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
3433margin around the image. Default is 0.
3434
3435`:relief RELIEF'
3436
3437RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
3438around an image.
3439
3440`:algorithm ALGO'
3441
47e351a3
GM
3442Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
3443
3444ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
3445edge-detection algorithm to the image.
3446
3447ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
3448apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
3449nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
3450position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
3451around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
3452neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
3453transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
3454x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
3455below.
3456
3457 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
3458 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
3459 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
3460
3461The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
3462resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
3463multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
3464of the factors' absolute values.
3465
327652be 3466Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
a933dad1 3467
47e351a3
GM
3468 (1 0 0
3469 0 0 0
3470 9 9 -1)
3471
3472Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
3473
3474 ( 2 -1 0
3475 -1 0 1
3476 0 1 -2)
3477
ba9eeda1
GM
3478ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
3479``disabled''.
3480
47e351a3
GM
3481`:mask MASK'
3482
3483If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
3484the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
3485image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
3486background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
3487image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from the corners is
3488the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
3489GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
3490image.
a933dad1 3491
47e351a3
GM
3492If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
3493in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
3494`:mask nil'.
a933dad1
DL
3495
3496`:file FILE'
3497
3498Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
3499search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
3500building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
3501may be present in the image specification.
3502
518df5c4
GM
3503`:data DATA'
3504
3505Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
3506supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
3507present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
3508support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
3509
a933dad1
DL
3510*** Supported image types
3511
b246b1f6 3512**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
3513
3514XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
3515properties supported are
3516
3517`:foreground FG'
3518
3519FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3520is the frame's foreground.
3521
46c5af7f 3522`:background BG'
a933dad1
DL
3523
3524BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3525the frame's background color.
3526
3527XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
3528case, the image specification must contain the following properties
3529instead of a `:file' property.
3530
3531`:width WIDTH'
3532
3533WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
3534
3535`:height HEIGHT'
3536
3537HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
3538
3539`:data DATA'
3540
3541DATA must be either
3542
3543 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
3544 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
3545
3546 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
3547
3548 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
3549 bitmap.
3550
c76e04a8
GM
3551 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
3552 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
3553 in the file.
3554
a933dad1
DL
3555**** XPM, image type `xpm'
3556
3557XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
3558`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
3559found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
3560`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
3561
3562Additional image properties supported are:
3563
3564`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
3565
3566SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
3567name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
3568name.
3569
3570XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
3571add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
3572
a933dad1
DL
3573The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
3574to display compressed images.
3575
3576**** PBM, image type `pbm'
3577
3578PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2b8e9c91
GM
3579mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for
3580mono images are
3581
3582`:foreground FG'
3583
3584FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3585is the frame's foreground.
3586
3587`:background FG'
3588
3589BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3590the frame's background color.
a933dad1
DL
3591
3592**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
3593
3594Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
3595package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
3596are:
3597
a933dad1
DL
3598**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
3599
3600Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
3601package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3602properties defined.
3603
3604**** GIF, image type `gif'
3605
3606Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
3607`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
3608
3609Additional image properties supported are:
3610
3611`:index INDEX'
3612
3613INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
3614multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
3615
3616This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
3617For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
3618at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
3619every 0.1 seconds.
3620
3621(defun show-anim (file max)
3622 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
3623 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
3624
3625(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
3626 (when (= idx max)
3627 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 3628 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
3629 (save-excursion
3630 (set-buffer buffer)
3631 (goto-char (point-min))
3632 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
3633 (insert-image img "x"))
3634 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
3635
3636**** PNG, image type `png'
3637
3638Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
3639package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3640properties defined.
3641
3642**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
3643
3644Additional image properties supported are:
3645
3646`:pt-width WIDTH'
3647
3648WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 3649integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
3650
3651`:pt-height HEIGHT'
3652
3653HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 3654must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
3655
3656`:bounding-box BOX'
3657
3658BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
3659the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
3660files. This is an required property.
3661
3662Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
3663lisp/gs.el.
3664
3665*** Lisp interface.
3666
79214ddf
FP
3667The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
3668which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
3669
3670Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
3671they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
3672The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
3673manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
3674images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
3675
3676*** Simplified image API, image.el
3677
3678The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
3679creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
3680can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
3681define an image based on available image types. The functions
3682`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
3683buffer.
3684
3685+++
3686** Display margins.
3687
3688Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
3689and images.
3690
3691To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
3692`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
3693`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
3694obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
3695`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
3696the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
3697of the display margins.
3698
3699You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
3700containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
3701one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
3702string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
3703in this file).
3704
3705+++
3706** Help display
3707
3708Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
3709moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
3710`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
3711that have a `help-echo' property.
3712
9662da0b 3713If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 3714is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
3715the window in which the help was found.
3716
3717If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
3718`help-echo' text property was found.
3719
3720If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
3721POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
3722
3723If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 3724the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 3725mouse.
d5aa31d8 3726
9662da0b
GM
3727If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
3728string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
3729
3730For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
3731determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
3732property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
3733For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
3734used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
3735
3736The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
3737the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
3738causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
3739
3740+++
3741** Vertical fractional scrolling.
3742
3743The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
3744This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
3745
3746The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
3747scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
3748The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
3749scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
3750used.
3751
79214ddf
FP
3752 (global-set-key [A-down]
3753 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 3754 (interactive)
79214ddf 3755 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 3756 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 3757 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
3758 #'(lambda ()
3759 (interactive)
79214ddf 3760 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
3761 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
3762
3763+++
3764** New hook `fontification-functions'.
3765
3766Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
3767when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
3768variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
3769is called with one argument, POS.
3770
3771At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
3772characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
3773as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
3774property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
3775`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
3776
3777+++
3778** Tool bar support.
3779
3780Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
3781parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
3782controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
3783suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
3784`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
3785automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
3786
3787*** Tool bar item definitions
3788
3789Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
3790`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
3791where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 3792
a933dad1
DL
3793CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
3794evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
3795the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
3796property (see below).
79214ddf 3797
a933dad1
DL
3798BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
3799binding are currently ignored.
3800
3801The following properties are recognized:
3802
3803`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 3804
a933dad1
DL
3805FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
3806or disabled.
79214ddf 3807
a933dad1 3808`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 3809
a933dad1 3810FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 3811
a933dad1
DL
3812`:filter FUNCTION'
3813
3814FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
3815FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
3816used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 3817
a933dad1
DL
3818`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
3819
3820TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
3821and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 3822
a933dad1
DL
3823`:image IMAGES'
3824
3825IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
3826image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
3827meaning of each of the four elements:
3828
3829 Index Use when item is
3830 ----------------------------------------
3831 0 enabled and selected
3832 1 enabled and deselected
3833 2 disabled and selected
3834 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 3835
4ba7246d
GM
3836If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
3837algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
3838
a933dad1 3839`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 3840
a933dad1
DL
3841Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
3842is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
3843
dab96841 3844The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
d1e68bce
DL
3845toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
3846to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
3847menu bar.
dab96841 3848
8628686a
DL
3849The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar
3850dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set
3851buffer-locally to override the global map.
3852
a933dad1
DL
3853*** Tool-bar-related variables.
3854
3855If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
3856resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
3857than 1/4 of the frame's size.
3858
79214ddf 3859If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
3860raised when the mouse moves over them.
3861
3862You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
3863`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
3864pixels. Default is 1.
3865
3866You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
3867`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
3868
3869*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
3870
3871You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 3872a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
3873
3874 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
3875 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
3876 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
3877
3878is the original tool bar item definition, then
3879
3880 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
3881
3882makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
3883item.
3884
3885** Mode line changes.
3886
3887+++
3888*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
3889
3890The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
3891that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
3892a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
3893
38941. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
3895a `local-map' text property.
3896
38972. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
3898that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
3899
39003. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
3901is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
3902`local-map' property.
3903
3904The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
3905properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
3906example.
3907
54522c9f
GM
3908*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
3909evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
3910
a933dad1
DL
3911+++
3912*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
3913variable mode-line-format to nil.
3914
3915+++
3916*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
3917
3918This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
3919`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
3920completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
3921`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
3922line.
3923
3924The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
3925`header-line'.
3926
3927The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
3928position in the header-line.
3929
3930+++
3931** Text property `display'
3932
623a0aae
GM
3933The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
3934replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
3935also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
3936the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
a933dad1
DL
3937below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
3938
623a0aae
GM
3939*** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
3940
3941To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
3942text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
3943
3944If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
3945marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
3946the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
3947is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3948simpler form STRING as property value.
3949
a933dad1
DL
3950*** Variable width and height spaces
3951
3952To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
3953specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
3954`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
3955area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
3956marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
3957displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3958simpler form STRETCH as property value.
3959
3960The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
3961PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
3962properties described below.
3963
3964The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
3965characters having the `display' property.
3966
3967- :width WIDTH
3968
3969Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
3970character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
3971
3972- :relative-width FACTOR
3973
3974Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
3975first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
3976same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
3977width of that character by FACTOR.
3978
3979- :align-to HPOS
3980
3981Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
3982value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
3983
3984Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
3985
3986- :height HEIGHT
3987
3988Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
3989normal line height.
3990
3991- :relative-height FACTOR
3992
3993The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
3994of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
3995
3996- :ascent ASCENT
3997
3998Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
3999used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
4000baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
4001equal to 100.
4002
4003You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
4004
4005*** Images
4006
4007A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
4008. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
4009in the display, the characters having this display specification in
4010their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
4011the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
4012`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
4013area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
4014the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
4015as display specification.
4016
4017*** Other display properties
4018
c9e73000 4019- (space-width FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
4020
4021Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
4022should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
4023integer or float.
4024
c9e73000 4025- (height HEIGHT)
a933dad1
DL
4026
4027Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
4028
4029If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
4030means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
4031the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
4032``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
4033a font is available counts as a step.
4034
4035If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
4036as tall as the frame's default font.
4037
4038If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
4039height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
4040
4041Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
4042`height' bound to the current specified font height.
4043
c9e73000 4044- (raise FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
4045
4046FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
4047font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
4048raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
4049amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
c9e73000 4050`height' subproperty.
a933dad1
DL
4051
4052*** Conditional display properties
4053
4054All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
4055has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
4056applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
4057During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
4058the text having the `display' property.
4059
4060The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
4061`(:when t SPEC)'.
4062
4063+++
4064** New menu separator types.
4065
4066Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
4067item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
4068treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
4069to specify other menu separator types.
4070
4071- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
4072
4073No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
4074separator occurs.
4075
4076- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
4077
4078A single line in the menu's foreground color.
4079
4080- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
4081
4082A double line in the menu's foreground color.
4083
4084- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
4085
4086A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4087
4088- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
4089
4090A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4091
4092- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
4093
4094A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
4095displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
4096
4097- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
4098
4099A single line with 3D raised appearance.
4100
4101- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
4102
4103A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
4104
4105- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
4106
4107A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
4108
4109- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
4110
4111Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4112
4113- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
4114
4115Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
4116
4117- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
4118
4119Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4120
4121- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
4122
4123Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
4124
4125Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
4126the corresponding single-line separators.
4127
4128+++
4129** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
4130
4131The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
4132`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
4133Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
4134that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
4135default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
4136default background is the background color of the frame, and the
4137default foreground is black.
4138
4139The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
4140(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
4141`ScrollBarBackground').
4142
4143Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
4144settings for scroll bar colors.
4145
4146+++
4147** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
4148display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
4149
4150---
4151** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
4152starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
4153on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
4154line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
4155the original window start.
4156
4157---
4158** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
4159`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
4160now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
4161
4162+++
4163** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
4164
4165A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
4166`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
4167windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
4168other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
4169
4170The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
4171fixed-width and fixed-height.
4172
4173 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
4174
4175A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
4176fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
4177window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
4178change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
4179temporarily to nil, for example
4180
4181 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
4182 (enlarge-window 10))
4183
79214ddf 4184Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 4185or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
4186
4187** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
4188terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
4189to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
4190overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
4191horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
4192support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050 4193
3787e12e
GM
4194
4195^L
4196* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
4197
4198** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
4199input.
4200
4201** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
4202
4203** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
4204
4205** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
4206only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
4207exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
4208(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
4209(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
4210
4211** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
4212been added.
4213
4214^L
4215* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
4216
4217** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
4218
4219^L
4220* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
4221
4222** Not new, but not mentioned before:
4223M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
4224\f
4225* Changes in Emacs 20.4
4226
4227** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
4228
4229You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
4230Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
4231`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
4232
4233If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
4234is the one that is used.
4235
4236** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
4237the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
4238Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
4239separate from the command's regular output.
4240Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
4241says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
4242In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
4243the buffer name.
4244
4245When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
4246output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
4247it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
4248cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
4249
4250** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
4251the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
4252is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
4253created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
4254
4255** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
4256example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
4257match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
4258quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
4259
4260** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
4261now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
4262if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
4263they never ignore case.
4264
4265** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
4266under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
4267applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
4268of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
4269just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
4270convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
4271part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
4272
4273If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
4274the same format that was used in the file before.
4275
4276You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
4277`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
4278
4279** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
4280renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
4281This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
4282
4283** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
4284The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
4285buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
4286your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
4287is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
4288end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
4289Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
4290
4291The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
4292eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
4293control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
4294format. You can now customize these variables.
4295
4296** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
4297filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
4298filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
4299enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
4300
4301** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
4302in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
4303windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
4304
4305** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
4306dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
4307doesn't have any effect.
4308
4309** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
4310not one per buffer.
4311
4312** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
4313use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
4314 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
4315
4316** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
4317To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
4318`auto-show-mode' command.
4319
4320** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
4321avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
4322versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
4323choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
4324occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
4325
4326** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
4327cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
4328
4329** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
4330character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
4331feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
4332
4333** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
4334the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
4335interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
4336and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
4337
4338** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
4339
4340The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
4341that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
4342one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
4343codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
4344set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
4345
4346Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
4347from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
4348
4349IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
4350equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
4351a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
4352`?' on other systems.
4353
4354IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
4355feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
4356Unix.
4357
4358Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
4359current codepage when it starts.
4360
4361** Mail changes
4362
4363*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
4364`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
4365appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
4366non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
4367MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
4368headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
4369latin-1:
4370
4371 MIME-version: 1.0
4372 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
4373 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
4374
4375*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
4376default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
4377default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
4378sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
4379buffer-file-coding-system.
4380
4381You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
4382sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
4383mail.
4384
4385*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
4386if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
4387Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
4388list of possible coding systems.
4389
4390** CC Mode changes
4391
4392*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
4393modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
4394longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
4395docstring for details.
4396
4397*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
4398symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
4399found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
4400prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
4401lineup functions use this feature currently.
4402
4403*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
4404"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
4405
4406*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
4407"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
4408
4409*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
4410from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
4411symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
4412c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
4413anonymous classes.
4414
4415*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
4416syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
4417
4418*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
4419inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
4420support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
4421function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
4422
4423*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
4424(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
4425brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
4426c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
4427(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
4428
4429*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
4430
4431*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
4432
4433*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
4434for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
4435
4436*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
4437
4438*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
4439associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
4440This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
4441circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
4442class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
4443
4444** Gnus changes.
4445
4446*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
4447added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
4448Gnus manual for the full story.
4449
4450*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
4451before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
4452group, which is created automatically.
4453
4454*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
4455values.
4456
4457*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
4458
4459*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
4460outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
4461
4462*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
4463`C-u C-c C-c'.
4464
4465*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
4466
4467*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
4468re-highlighting of the article buffer.
4469
4470*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
4471
4472*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
4473Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
4474
4475*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
4476`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
4477
4478*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
4479control over simplification.
4480
4481*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
4482
4483*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
4484limit.
4485
4486*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
4487
4488*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
4489
4490*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
4491If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
4492rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
4493
4494*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
4495`a' forces normal posting method.
4496
4497*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
4498-- `W d'.
4499
4500*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
4501to a non-nil value.
4502
4503*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
4504where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
4505
4506*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
4507has been added.
4508
4509*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
4510
4511*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
4512
4513*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
4514`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
4515
4516*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
4517`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
4518
4519*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
4520
4521*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
4522been added.
4523
4524*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
4525`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
4526
4527*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
4528updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
4529
4530*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
4531
4532*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
4533
4534*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
4535
4536** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
4537
4538*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
4539options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
4540nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
4541
4542*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
4543TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
4544of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
4545TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
4546can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
4547
4548*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
4549All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
4550but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
4551the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
4552
4553*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
4554the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
4555buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
4556mismatch.
4557
4558** Changes to RefTeX mode
4559
4560*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
4561file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
4562
4563*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
4564lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
4565characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
4566removed from the label.
4567
4568*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
4569a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
4570
4571*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
4572customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
4573
4574*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
4575`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
4576expressions.
4577
4578*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
4579
4580** New/deleted modes and packages
4581
4582*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
4583SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
4584
4585*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
4586editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
4587SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
4588
4589*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
4590changes with a special face.
4591
4592*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
4593this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
4594Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
4595\f
4596* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
4597
4598** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
4599This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
4600conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
4601and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
4602check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
4603
4604The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
4605Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
4606distribution when the config.bat script is run.
4607
4608** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
4609MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
4610controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
4611directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
4612Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
4613on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
4614string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
4615program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
4616printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
4617
4618** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
4619output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
4620available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
4621input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
4622temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
4623program.
4624
4625An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
4626and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
4627programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
4628automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
4629as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
4630ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
4631
4632** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
4633a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
4634MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
4635was not documented clearly before.
4636
4637** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
4638This includes Tetris and Snake.
4639\f
4640* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
4641
4642** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
4643return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
4644They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
4645meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
4646
4647** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
4648WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
4649and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
4650
4651** Changes in the file-attributes function.
4652
4653*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
4654It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
4655
4656*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
4657the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
4658integers.
4659
4660** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
4661files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
4662arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
4663file names and attributes are returned.
4664
4665** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
4666sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
4667accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
4668It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
4669returns the result.
4670
4671** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
4672to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
4673
4674** New functions for base64 conversion:
4675
4676The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
4677into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
4678performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
4679optionally.
4680
4681Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
4682job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
4683
4684**
4685The new function process-running-child-p
4686will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
4687terminal to its own child process.
4688
4689** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
4690when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
4691to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
4692itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
4693
4694** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
4695be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
4696
4697** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
4698:included is an alias for :visible.
4699
4700easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
4701easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
4702to move or copy menu entries.
4703
4704** Multibyte editing changes
4705
4706*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
4707an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
4708make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
4709work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
4710char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
4711 (setq char (sref str idx)
4712 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
4713The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
4714
4715If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
4716(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
4717 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
4718
4719*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
4720region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
4721deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
4722
4723 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
4724
4725This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
4726across the boundary.
4727
4728*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
4729`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
4730 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
4731 contains 8-bit characters.
4732 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
4733 contains invalid characters.
4734
4735*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
4736text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
4737preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
4738text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
4739way.
4740
4741*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
4742If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
4743end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
4744prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
4745
4746*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
4747compose Thai characters in a string.
4748
4749** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
4750argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
4751for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
4752menus should always use the third argument.
4753
4754** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
4755read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
4756arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
4757input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
4758
4759** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
4760of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
4761programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
4762inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
4763
4764** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
4765the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
4766returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
4767echo area contents.
4768
4769 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
4770
4771** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
4772NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
4773requested feature cannot be loaded.
4774
4775** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
4776foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
4777means to clear out that attribute.
4778
4779** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
4780gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
4781
4782** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
4783read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
4784unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
4785end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
4786
4787** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
4788the gap of the current buffer.
4789
4790** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
4791to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
4792current buffer.
4793
4794** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
4795facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
4796These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
4797it back in after any modifications have been made.
4798\f
4799* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
4800
4801** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
4802the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
4803/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
4804directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
4805subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
4806
4807Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
4808names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
4809Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
4810which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
4811these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
4812
4813Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
4814starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
4815time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
4816
4817This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
4818Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
4819to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
4820subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
4821`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
4822results.
4823
4824** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
4825GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
4826that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
4827fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
4828\f
4829* Changes in Emacs 20.3
4830
4831** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
4832including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
4833it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
4834perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
4835
4836** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
4837specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
4838region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
4839further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
4840command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
4841within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
4842are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
4843region.
4844
4845In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
4846selective undo.
4847
4848** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
4849unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
4850buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
4851effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
4852Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
4853
4854The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
4855though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
4856-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
4857load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
4858
4859** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
4860no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
4861enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
4862something that most users not do.
4863
4864** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
4865operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
4866The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
4867applications.
4868
4869C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
4870pasting operations.
4871
4872** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
4873setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
4874like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
4875printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
4876`ps-printer-name'.
4877
4878** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
4879minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
4880any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
4881except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
4882incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
4883hits a new word.
4884
4885Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
4886Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
4887to be confused by TeX commands.
4888
4889You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
4890correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
4891clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
4892of various alternative replacements and actions.
4893
4894Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
4895the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
4896corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
4897alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
4898flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
4899
4900Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
4901flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
4902
4903** Changes in input method usage.
4904
4905Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
4906the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
4907respectively.
4908
4909You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
4910
4911If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
4912of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
4913
4914The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
4915that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
4916
4917 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
4918
4919 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
4920
4921 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
4922 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
4923
4924 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
4925 given in the following case:
4926 o When you are using a complex input method.
4927 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
4928
4929If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
4930input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
4931and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
4932setting it to t is helpful.
4933
4934The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
4935
4936In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
4937keys:
4938 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
4939 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
4940 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
4941These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
4942environment.
4943
4944** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
4945names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
4946minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
4947get
4948
4949 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
4950
4951which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
4952
4953Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
4954Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
4955
4956** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
4957at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
4958its owner and group.
4959
4960** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
4961Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
4962
4963** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
4964contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
4965
4966** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
4967which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
4968in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
4969by the left edge of the rectangle.
4970
4971** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
4972increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
4973C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
4974for writing keyboard macros.
4975
4976** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
4977files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
4978frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
4979the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
4980additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
4981info.
4982
4983** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
4984
4985** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
4986query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
4987contents only.
4988
4989** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
4990confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
4991the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
4992says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
4993
4994** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
4995non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
4996literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
4997
4998** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
4999now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
5000Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
5001inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
5002
5003** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
5004failure if the command produces no output.
5005
5006** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
5007manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
5008the mouse.
5009
5010** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
5011mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
5012function and variable names.
5013
5014** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
5015reading specific files. This has higher priority than
5016file-coding-system-alist.
5017
5018** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
5019t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
5020converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
5021the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
5022according to the current fontset.
5023
5024** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
5025
5026The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
5027that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
5028nonascii-insert-offset.
5029
5030For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
5031enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
5032nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
5033characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
5034
5035** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
5036an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
5037
5038** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
5039letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
5040
5041** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
5042are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
5043command keys.
5044
5045** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
5046user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
5047
5048Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
5049user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
5050all variables that have documentation.
5051
5052** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
5053shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
5054that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
5055minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
5056it should show; the default is 20.
5057
5058Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
5059the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
5060of your input.
5061
5062** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
5063all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
5064recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
5065argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
5066the customizable options which were changed since that version.
5067Newly added options are included as well.
5068
5069If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
5070then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
5071for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
5072
5073This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
5074Customize menu.
5075
5076** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
5077the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
5078
5079** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
5080buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
5081invoked.
5082
5083** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
5084that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
5085The default is 1.
5086
5087** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
5088syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
5089new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
5090(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
5091sensibly.
5092
5093** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
5094
5095** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
5096value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
5097two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
5098
5099** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
5100reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
5101for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
5102every night.
5103
5104** Desktop changes
5105
5106*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
5107the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
5108
5109*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
5110and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
5111
5112** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
5113read and post multi-lingual articles.
5114
5115** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
5116doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
5117be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
5118outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
5119the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
5120made invisible again.
5121
5122** Mail reading and sending changes
5123
5124*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
5125the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
5126changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
5127toggle.
5128
5129*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
5130now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
5131summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
5132the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
5133rmail-default-body-file.
5134
5135*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
5136longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
5137handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
5138
5139*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
5140it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
5141is evaluated to insert the signature.
5142
5143*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
5144outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
5145handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
5146putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
5147transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
5148especially interested in trying feedmail.
5149
5150feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
5151feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
5152provided by feedmail are:
5153
5154**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
5155stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
5156there is also a queue for draft messages
5157
5158**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
5159be prompted for confirmation
5160
5161**** does smart filling of address headers
5162
5163**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
5164the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
5165can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
5166
5167**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
5168the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
5169/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
5170function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
5171
5172** Dired changes
5173
5174*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
5175files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
5176
5177*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
5178run Dired on the directory name at point.
5179
5180*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
5181files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
5182for a specified regexp.
5183
5184** VC Changes
5185
5186*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
5187conveniently.
5188
5189*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
5190faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
5191Dired.
5192
5193VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
5194directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
5195listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
5196currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
5197
5198You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
5199then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
5200vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
5201control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
5202on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
5203
5204All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
5205is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
5206`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
5207the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
5208`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
5209
5210The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
5211toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
5212VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
5213`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
5214
5215Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
5216ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
5217command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
5218
5219*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
5220file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
5221session to resolve them.
5222
5223Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
5224resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
5225contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
5226uses as well).
5227
5228*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
5229command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
5230you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
5231either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
5232branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
5233If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
5234using ediff.
5235
5236** Changes in Font Lock
5237
5238*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
5239are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
5240use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
5241unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
5242compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
5243
5244** Frame name display changes
5245
5246*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
5247frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
5248raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
5249when many frames are invisible or iconified.
5250
5251*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
5252frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
5253menu.
5254
5255** Comint (subshell) changes
5256
5257*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
5258subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
5259with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
5260
5261*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
5262
5263C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
5264that is, the line after the last line you got.
5265You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
5266
5267C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
5268send the current line together with the following line, when you send
5269the following line.
5270
5271C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
5272which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
5273previously sent input.
5274
5275C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
5276it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
5277as the search string.
5278
5279*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
5280automatically in compilation-mode windows.
5281
5282** C mode changes
5283
5284*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
5285and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
5286assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
5287definition.
5288
5289*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
5290(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
5291Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
5292style is still the default however.
5293
5294*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
5295
5296*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
5297are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
5298them. They do not have key bindings by default.
5299
5300*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
5301and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
5302
5303*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
5304namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
5305
5306*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
5307makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
5308
5309*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
5310c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
5311
5312*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
5313should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
5314package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
5315variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
5316
5317** Changes to hippie-expand.
5318
5319*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
5320non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
5321which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
5322
5323*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
5324non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
5325expanding dynamically.
5326
5327*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
5328non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
5329
5330*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
5331non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
5332this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
5333expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
5334
5335*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
5336
5337** Changes in BibTeX mode.
5338
5339*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
5340bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
5341automatic key generation. This replaces variable
5342bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
5343against the first word in the title.
5344
5345*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
5346capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
5347bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
5348lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
5349lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
5350bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
5351
5352*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
5353generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
5354replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
5355bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
5356
5357** Changes in vcursor.el.
5358
5359*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
5360and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
5361variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
5362entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
5363`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
5364in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
5365
5366*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
5367Editing group once the package is loaded.
5368
5369*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
5370generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
5371vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
5372
5373*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
5374vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
5375
5376** Ispell changes.
5377
5378*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
5379buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
5380are identified by syntax tables in effect.
5381
5382*** Generic region skipping implemented.
5383A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
5384and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
5385defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
5386include:
5387
5388 o URLs are automatically skipped
5389 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
5390
5391*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
5392
5393** Changes to RefTeX mode
5394
5395RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
5396large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
5397re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
5398section `Optimizations' in the manual.
5399
5400*** New recursive parser.
5401
5402The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
5403entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
5404recursive parser scans the individual files.
5405
5406*** Parsing only part of a document.
5407
5408Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
5409partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
5410the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
5411
5412 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
5413
5414*** Storing parsing information in a file.
5415
5416This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
5417
5418 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
5419
5420*** Using multiple selection buffers
5421
5422If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
5423for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
5424
5425 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
5426
5427*** References to external documents.
5428
5429The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
5430documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
5431documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
5432macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
5433RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
5434the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
5435The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
5436
5437*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
5438
5439The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
5440and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
5441
5442Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
5443the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
5444
5445*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
5446
5447The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
5448buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
5449
5450*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
5451
5452The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
5453contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
5454`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
5455have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
5456enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
5457at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
5458more.
5459
5460*** Support for the varioref package
5461
5462The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
5463
5464*** New hooks
5465
5466Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
5467and citations are created. These hooks are
5468`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
5469`reftex-format-cite-function'.
5470
5471*** Citations outside LaTeX
5472
5473The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
5474a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
5475
5476*** Short context is no longer fontified.
5477
5478The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
5479fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
5480fontified, use
5481
5482 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
5483
5484** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
5485With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
5486the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
5487directories that contain the same file name.
5488
5489Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
5490Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
5491file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
5492Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
5493have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
5494names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
5495directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
5496directory.
5497
5498** New modes and packages
5499
5500*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
5501It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
5502it, but some do not.
5503
5504*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
5505code.
5506
5507*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
5508current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
5509around in a buffer.
5510
5511Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
5512
5513*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
5514uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
5515be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
5516established system of notation similar to Chess.
5517
5518*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
5519documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
5520guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
5521
5522*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
5523available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
5524system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
5525simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
5526functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
5527the like.
5528
5529*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
5530identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
5531
5532*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
5533within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
5534used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
5535the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
5536
5537*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
5538
5539 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
5540 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
5541 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
5542 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
5543 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
5544 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
5545 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
5546 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
5547 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
5548 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
5549 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
5550
5551 Platform-specific modes:
5552
5553 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
5554 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
5555 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
5556 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
5557 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
5558 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
5559 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
5560 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
5561 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
5562\f
5563* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5564
5565** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
5566use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
5567That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
5568Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
5569
5570Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
5571you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
5572consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
5573
5574** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
5575and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
5576specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
5577searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
5578
5579** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
5580multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
5581character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
5582environment.
5583
5584** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
5585take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
5586string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
5587current input method for reading this one event.
5588
5589** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
5590now control whether to output certain characters as
5591backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
5592non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
5593characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
5594in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
5595\f
5596* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5597
5598** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
5599of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
5600
5601** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
5602in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
5603always increases point by 1.
5604
5605The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
5606considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
5607
5608See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
5609
5610** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
5611Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
5612default value changed. For example,
5613
5614 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
5615 :type 'integer
5616 :group 'foo
5617 :version "20.3")
5618
5619 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
5620 :version "20.3")
5621
5622If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
5623default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
5624is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
5625`:version' in the top level group.
5626
5627This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
5628
5629** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
5630starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
5631
5632However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
5633symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
5634support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
5635to themselves.
5636
5637If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
5638this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
5639values whatever.
5640
5641** There is a new debugger command, R.
5642It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
5643in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
5644
5645** Frame-local variables.
5646
5647You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
5648the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
5649local bindings for that variable.
5650
5651These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
5652frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
5653modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
5654parameter name.
5655
5656Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
5657Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
5658active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
5659that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
5660
5661It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
5662clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
5663very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
5664through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
5665
5666** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
5667"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
5668evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
5669makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
5670See the documentation in sregex.el.
5671
5672** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
5673is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
5674parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
5675The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
5676
5677** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
5678If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
5679
5680** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
5681known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
5682define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
5683
5684** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
5685when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
5686it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
5687history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
5688
5689The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
5690return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
5691empty input.
5692
5693** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
5694for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
5695`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
5696Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
5697`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
5698
5699** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
5700echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
5701a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
5702default password to use if the user enters nothing.
5703
5704** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
5705specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
5706function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
5707place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
5708non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
5709
5710** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
5711If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
5712up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
5713end of the window, even if this requires computation.
5714
5715** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
5716which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
5717If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
5718
5719** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
5720holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
5721was directed to display this buffer.
5722
5723** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
5724with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
5725describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
5726other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
5727set-window-configuration.
5728
5729** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
5730window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
5731positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
5732windows and the choice of buffers to display.
5733
5734** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
5735override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
5736look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
5737
5738If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
5739non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
5740map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
5741
5742minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
5743and it is meant to be set by major modes.
5744
5745** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
5746except that it discards all text properties from the result.
5747
5748** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
5749USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
5750floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
5751
5752** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
5753to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
5754in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
5755it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
5756
5757** Menu changes
5758
5759*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
5760keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
5761better supported.
5762
5763The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
5764a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
5765you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
5766can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
5767then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
5768
5769*** A new format for menu items is supported.
5770
5771In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
5772 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
5773defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
5774starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
5775
5776The format is:
5777 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
5778 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
5779where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
5780string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
5781The supported properties include
5782
5783:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5784 item is enabled.
5785:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5786 item should appear in the menu.
5787:filter FILTER-FN
5788 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
5789 which will be REAL-BINDING.
5790 It should return a binding to use instead.
5791:keys DESCRIPTION
5792 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
5793 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
5794 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
5795:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
5796 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
5797 keyboard binding.
5798:key-sequence nil
5799 This means that the command normally has no
5800 keyboard equivalent.
5801:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
5802:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
5803 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
5804 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
5805 value says whether this button is currently selected.
5806
5807Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
5808Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
5809
5810(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
5811
5812** New event types
5813
5814*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
5815mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
5816corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
5817which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
5818
5819 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
5820
5821where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5822same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
5823indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
5824negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
5825the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
5826forward, away from the user.
5827
5828As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5829
5830*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
5831files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
5832and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
5833filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
5834loaded into Emacs. The format is:
5835
5836 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
5837
5838where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5839same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
5840that were dragged and dropped.
5841
5842As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5843
5844** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
5845
5846*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
5847any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
5848to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
5849
5850*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
5851can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
5852that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
5853
5854*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
5855in Emacs 19 and before.
5856
5857The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
5858The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
5859
5860*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
5861buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
5862unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
5863representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
5864
5865This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
5866as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
5867viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
5868one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
5869will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
5870
5871This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
5872representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
5873(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
5874consistent with the new representation.
5875
5876*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
5877representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
5878about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
5879however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5880
5881The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
5882nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
5883using the table nonascii-translation-table.
5884
5885*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
5886representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
5887representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5888
5889The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
5890loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
5891is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
5892
5893*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5894which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
5895
5896*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5897which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
5898
5899*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
5900portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
5901so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
5902You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
5903
5904*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
5905it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
5906
5907*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
5908convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
5909buffer or string being searched.
5910
5911One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
5912[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
5913searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
5914searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
5915obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
5916you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
5917expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
5918
5919*** Structure of coding system changed.
5920
5921All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
5922by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
5923which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
5924as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
5925vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
5926your own alias name of a coding system by the function
5927define-coding-system-alias.
5928
5929The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
5930the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
5931access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
5932pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
5933character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
5934safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
5935'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
5936`iso-8859-1'.
5937
5938Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
5939The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
5940coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
5941(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
5942
5943Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
5944also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
5945are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
5946the other character sets and read it back correctly.
5947
5948*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
5949proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
5950This function requires a user interaction.
5951
5952*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
5953find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
5954select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
5955systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
5956a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
5957select-safe-coding-system.
5958
5959*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
5960decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
5961last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
5962was done.
5963
5964*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
5965used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
5966coding systems used by some specific language environment.
5967
5968*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
5969return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
5970characters are found, they now return a list of single element
5971`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
5972
5973*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
5974coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
5975coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
5976converted.
5977
5978*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
5979coding system for communicating with other X clients.
5980
5981*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
5982character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
5983character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
5984each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
5985either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
5986range of characters.
5987
5988*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
5989Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
5990
5991*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
5992in the current buffer at position POS.
5993
5994*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
5995input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
5996function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
5997character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
5998event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
5999binding input-method-function to nil.
6000
6001The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
6002method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
6003input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
6004the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
6005not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
6006
6007The input method function is not called when reading the second and
6008subsequent events of a key sequence.
6009
6010*** You can customize any language environment by using
6011set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
6012
6013The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
6014customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
6015instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
6016environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
6017exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
6018\f
6019* Changes in Emacs 20.1
6020
6021** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
6022options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
6023at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
6024tree structure.
6025
6026M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
6027user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
6028
6029With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
6030session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
6031in your .emacs file.)
6032
6033** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
6034You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
6035
6036** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
6037This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
6038
6039** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
6040immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
6041kills the region.
6042
6043The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
6044delete the character before point, as usual.
6045
6046** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
6047on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
6048by setting search-highlight to nil.)
6049
6050** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
6051insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
6052the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
6053onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
6054history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
6055past.)
6056
6057** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
6058This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
6059in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
6060TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
6061makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
6062
6063As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
6064and is an alias for it.
6065
6066If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
6067use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
6068
6069** Scrolling changes
6070
6071*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
6072position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
6073
6074In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
6075on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
6076where it started.
6077
6078*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
6079move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
6080screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
6081does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
6082
6083*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
6084top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
6085comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
6086recenters the window.
6087
6088** International character set support (MULE)
6089
6090Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
6091including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
6092Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
6093Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
6094features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
6095MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
6096
6097Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
6098coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
6099character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
6100variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
6101into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
6102
6103Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
6104generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
6105supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
6106language, to make it possible to type them.
6107
6108The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
6109character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
6110
6111The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
6112to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
6113
6114You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
6115
6116 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
6117
6118Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
6119characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
6120argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
6121already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
6122characters for their work until they want to change.
6123
6124*** Input methods
6125
6126An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
6127specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
6128has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
6129the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
6130support several input methods.
6131
6132The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
6133another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
6134work.
6135
6136A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
6137characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
6138composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
6139consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
6140sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
6141letter.
6142
6143The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
6144by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
6145First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
6146marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
6147mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
6148
6149None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
6150they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
6151phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
6152converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
6153
6154Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
6155word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
6156typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
6157the first guess is wrong.
6158
6159*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
6160turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
6161
6162If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
6163byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
6164they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
6165the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
6166
6167However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
6168use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
6169includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
6170translate automatically to and from either one.
6171
6172*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
6173
6174Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
6175file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
6176sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
6177what you want.
6178
6179If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
6180example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
6181system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
6182multibyte characters in that buffer.
6183
6184If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
6185character conversion as well.
6186
6187*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
6188
6189A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
6190Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
6191requires using many fonts.
6192
6193Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
6194collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
6195
6196A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
6197the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
6198have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
6199you would use a font.
6200
6201If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
6202specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
6203display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
6204
6205The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
6206(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
6207characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
6208or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
6209and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
6210
6211*** Defining fontsets.
6212
6213Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
6214chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
6215with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
6216
6217Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
6218of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
6219`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
6220standard fontset are created automatically.
6221
6222If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
6223argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
6224FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
6225with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
6226name is `fontset-startup'.
6227
6228Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
6229The resource value should have this form:
6230 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
6231FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
6232 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
6233 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
6234 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
6235The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
6236of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
6237CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
6238FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
6239
6240Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
6241last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
6242You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
6243
6244For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
6245font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
6246following resource,
6247 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
6248the font for ASCII is generated as below:
6249 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
6250Here is the substitution rule:
6251 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
6252 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
6253 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
6254 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
6255 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
6256
6257The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
6258fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
6259that function explicitly to create a fontset.
6260
6261With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
6262like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
6263name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
6264fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
6265fontsets.
6266
6267*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
6268defaults for a particular choice of language.
6269
6270Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
6271method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
6272visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
6273already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
6274language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
6275system for new files that you create.
6276
6277It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
6278set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
6279whole Emacs session.
6280
6281For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
6282chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
6283with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
6284
6285*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
6286specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
6287specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
6288the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
6289coding systems that Emacs supports.
6290
6291*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
6292lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
6293This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
6294After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
6295is used for *the immediately following command*.
6296
6297So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
6298write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
6299
6300If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
6301then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
6302
6303For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
6304visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
6305
6306*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
6307construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
6308to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
6309specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
6310of the file.
6311
6312*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
6313the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
6314code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
6315translated into that character code.
6316
6317This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
6318various countries to support the languages of those countries.
6319
6320By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
6321
6322*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
6323the coding system for keyboard input.
6324
6325Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
6326with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
6327some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
6328
6329By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
6330
6331Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
6332input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
6333translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
6334to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
6335designed to work with terminals.
6336
6337*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
6338specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
6339This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
6340has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
6341translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
6342in the corresponding buffer.
6343
6344By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
6345
6346*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
6347to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
6348It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
6349
6350*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
6351an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
6352command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
6353want to use.
6354
6355C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
6356method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
6357
6358*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
6359layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
6360remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
6361which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
6362
6363*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
6364the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
6365related information.
6366
6367*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
6368HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
6369scripts.
6370
6371*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
6372information about the support for a particular language.
6373You specify the language as an argument.
6374
6375*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
6376the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
6377first dash.
6378
6379A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
6380(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
6381whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
63821 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
6383
6384 A alternativnyj (Russian)
6385 B big5 (Chinese)
6386 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
6387 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
6388 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
6389 E euc-japan (Japanese)
6390 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6391 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
6392 K euc-korea (Korean)
6393 R koi8 (Russian)
6394 Q tibetan
6395 S shift_jis (Japanese)
6396 T lao
6397 T tis620 (Thai)
6398 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
6399 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6400 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
6401 v viqr (Vietnamese)
6402 z hz (Chinese)
6403
6404When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
6405two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
6406coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
6407keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
6408
6409*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
6410conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
6411
6412When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
6413into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
6414rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
6415Rmail files themselves.
6416
6417*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
6418conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
6419
6420Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
6421for sending mail:
6422
6423- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
6424- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
6425- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
6426 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
6427- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
6428
6429*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
6430to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
6431Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
6432translations.
6433
6434** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
6435of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
6436insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
6437without any conversion.
6438
6439** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
6440You can now specify any number of octal digits.
6441RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
6442any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
6443
6444** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
6445functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
6446
6447Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
6448Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
6449
6450Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
6451mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
6452
6453** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
6454complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
6455in the buffer before point.
6456
6457With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
6458symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
6459you are using.
6460
6461With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
6462just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
6463
6464** File locking works with NFS now.
6465
6466The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
6467in the same directory as FILENAME.
6468
6469This means that collision detection between two different machines now
6470works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
6471can become a bottleneck.
6472
6473The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
6474does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
6475create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
6476file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
6477rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
6478so useful that the change is worth while.
6479
6480When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
6481are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
6482collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
6483tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
6484
6485** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
6486it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
6487show-paren-mode.
6488
6489** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
6490selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
6491delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
6492
6493** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
6494within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
6495complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
6496
6497** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
6498it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
6499set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
6500
6501** Changes in View mode.
6502
6503*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
6504Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
6505
6506*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
6507view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
6508
6509*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
6510previous state.
6511
6512*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
6513scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
6514
6515*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
6516non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
6517not just the selected window.
6518
6519*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
6520read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
6521turns View mode on or off.
6522
6523*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
6524how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
6525delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
6526
6527** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
6528now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
6529
6530** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
6531has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
6532presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
6533which version to compare with.
6534
6535** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
6536blocks if a match is inside the block.
6537
6538The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
6539is outside the block. By customizing the variable
6540isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
6541shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
6542
6543By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
6544of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
6545blocks, all of them or none.
6546
6547** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
6548current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
6549confirmation first.
6550
6551** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
6552now changes the major mode according to that file name.
6553However, the mode will not be changed if
6554(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
6555(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
6556 not suitable for ordinary files, or
6557(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
6558
6559This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
6560
6561However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
6562these commands do not change the major mode.
6563
6564** M-x occur changes.
6565
6566*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
6567it performs a case-sensitive search.
6568
6569*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
6570if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
6571using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
6572
6573** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
6574in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
6575window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
6576that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
6577buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
6578
6579** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
6580after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
6581appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
6582come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
6583
6584** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
6585selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
6586buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
6587
6588** Outline mode changes.
6589
6590*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
6591
6592*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
6593
6594** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
6595you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
6596Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
6597was already active.
6598
6599The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
6600unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
6601get confused by it.
6602
6603If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
6604set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
6605
6606** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
6607
6608*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
6609conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
6610character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
6611including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
6612
6613The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
6614mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
6615copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
6616
6617*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
6618are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
6619values.
6620
6621`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
6622case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
6623`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
6624case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
6625
6626** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
6627certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
6628can be. The default value is 30.
6629
6630** Changes in Mail mode.
6631
6632*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
6633Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
6634composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
6635`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
6636`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
6637behavior.
6638
6639C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
6640compose-mail-other-frame.
6641
6642*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
6643the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
6644replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
6645buffer that shows the original message.
6646
6647*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
6648with separator lines around the contents.
6649
6650*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
6651in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
6652definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
6653need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
6654
6655*** New features in the mail-complete command.
6656
6657**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
6658for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
6659controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
6660Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
6661
6662**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
6663to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
6664/etc/passwd.
6665
6666**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
6667to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
6668/etc/passwd.
6669
6670** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
6671special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
6672directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
6673reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
6674
6675Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
6676when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
6677be taken to be magic.
6678
6679** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
6680files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
6681available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
6682
6683M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
6684(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
6685
6686** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
6687suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
6688
6689In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
6690
6691new key dired.el binding old key
6692------- ---------------- -------
6693 * c dired-change-marks c
6694 * m dired-mark m
6695 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
6696 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
6697 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
6698 * u dired-unmark u
6699 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
6700 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
6701 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
6702 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
6703 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
6704 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
6705
6706** Rmail changes.
6707
6708*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
6709saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
6710chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
6711each time you run it.
6712
6713*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
6714whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
6715
6716*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
6717messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
6718means to move in the opposite direction.
6719
6720*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
6721you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
6722
6723*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
6724just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
6725It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
6726can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
6727for output.
6728
6729** Gnus changes.
6730
6731*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
6732
6733*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
6734Gnus.
6735
6736*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
6737`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
6738
6739*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
6740article mode line.
6741
6742*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
6743
6744*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
6745
6746(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
6747
6748*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
6749are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
6750`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
6751
6752*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
6753
6754*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
6755
6756*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
6757See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
6758
6759*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
6760Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
6761used to pick articles.
6762
6763*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
6764another have been added.
6765
6766 `M-x gnus-change-server'
6767
6768*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
6769generating lines in buffers.
6770
6771*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
6772`M-C-_'.
6773
6774*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
6775
6776*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
6777
6778 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
6779
6780*** Scores can be decayed.
6781
6782 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
6783
6784*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
6785Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
6786
6787*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
6788the native server.
6789
6790 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
6791
6792*** A new command for reading collections of documents
6793(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
6794
6795*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
6796
6797*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
6798even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
6799
6800*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
6801(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
6802
6803 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
6804 a group.
6805
6806*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
6807sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
6808
6809 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
6810
6811*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
6812
6813 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
6814
6815*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
6816
6817 Use the `Y c' command.
6818
6819*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
6820
6821*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
6822
6823 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
6824
6825*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
6826from incoming mail before saving the mail.
6827
6828 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
6829
6830*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
6831
6832*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
6833the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
6834
6835 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
6836
6837Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
6838and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
6839from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
6840hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
6841this issue.)
6842
6843Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
6844automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
6845particular news group. This can be done by:
6846
6847 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
6848
6849Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
6850of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
6851"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
6852system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
6853for reading and posting).
6854
6855CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
6856 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
6857Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
6858newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
6859there.
6860
6861Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
6862default. Here are some of these default settings:
6863
6864 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
6865 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
6866 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
6867 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
6868 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
6869
6870When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
6871the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
6872
6873** CC mode changes.
6874
6875*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
6876code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
6877values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
6878this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
6879Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
6880loaded.
6881
6882If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
6883Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
6884style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
6885share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
6886c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
6887must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
6888
6889*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
6890of the current buffer.
6891
6892*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
6893it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
6894of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
6895
6896*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
6897style that the Python developers like.
6898
6899*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
6900This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
6901just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
6902
6903** VC Changes [new]
6904
6905** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
6906name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
6907directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
6908
6909This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
6910master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
6911developers.
6912
6913You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
6914RET in a buffer visiting that file.
6915
6916*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
6917other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
6918writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
6919calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
6920
6921*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
6922version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
6923
6924** Calendar changes.
6925
6926A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
6927of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
6928for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
6929
6930** ps-print changes
6931
6932There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
6933
6934*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
6935
6936The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
6937formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
6938`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
6939`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
6940It defaults to `letter'.
6941If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
6942
6943The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
6944of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
6945non-nil means "landscape" mode.
6946
6947The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
6948It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
6949It defaults to 1.
6950
6951*** Horizontal layout
6952
6953The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
6954`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
6955All are measured in points.
6956
6957*** Vertical layout
6958
6959The vertical layout is determined by the variables
6960`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
6961All are measured in points.
6962
6963*** Headers
6964
6965If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
6966`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
6967margin above the text.
6968
6969If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
6970framing box is printed around the header.
6971
6972The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
6973`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
6974
6975The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
6976`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
6977`ps-header-font-size'.
6978
6979*** Font managing
6980
6981The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
6982used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
6983`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
6984elements to this alist.
6985
6986The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
6987for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
6988
6989** hideshow changes.
6990
6991*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
6992C++, ; for lisp).
6993
6994*** Support for java-mode added.
6995
6996*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
6997in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
6998
6999*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
7000the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
7001way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
7002
7003*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
7004robust and a lot faster.
7005
7006*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
7007
7008*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
7009to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
7010documentation for more details.
7011
7012** Changes in Enriched mode.
7013
7014*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
7015filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
7016of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
7017use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
7018the next time unless the fill-column is different.
7019
7020*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
7021distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
7022as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
7023as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
7024
7025** Font Lock mode
7026
7027*** Custom support
7028
7029The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
7030font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
7031faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
7032group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
7033your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
7034consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
7035
7036You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
7037
7038*** Maximum decoration
7039
7040Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
7041default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
7042of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
7043supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
7044to get the old behavior.
7045
7046*** New support
7047
7048Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
7049
7050Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
7051support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
7052
7053*** Configurable support
7054
7055Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
7056additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
7057c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
7058java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
7059list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
7060of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
7061convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
7062
7063Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
7064way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
7065it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
7066
7067*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
7068
7069You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
7070highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
7071for any mode.
7072
7073For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
7074
7075 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
7076
7077in your ~/.emacs.
7078
7079*** New faces
7080
7081Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
7082font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
7083distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
7084to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
7085
7086*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
7087
7088The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
7089cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
7090same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
7091
7092*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
7093
7094The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
7095according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
7096the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
7097non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
7098refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
7099the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
7100Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
7101
7102This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
7103For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
7104this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
7105refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
7106containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
7107the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
7108
7109As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
7110
7111Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
7112Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
7113Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
7114new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
7115
7116If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
7117settings.
7118
7119** Ada mode changes.
7120
7121*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
7122If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
7123procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
7124you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
7125stubs.
7126
7127*** There are two new commands:
7128 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
7129 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
7130
7131The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
7132`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
7133`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
7134
7135*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
7136is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
7137Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
7138
7139*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
7140formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
7141places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
7142space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
7143
7144** Scheme mode changes.
7145
7146*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
7147mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
7148for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
7149with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
7150have any effect.
7151
7152If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
7153still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
7154scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
7155variables as buffer-local variables.
7156
7157*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
7158Use M-x dsssl-mode.
7159
7160** Changes to the emacsclient program
7161
7162*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
7163USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
7164associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
7165can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
7166
7167*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
7168it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
7169buffer in Emacs.
7170
7171*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
7172use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
7173ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
7174option takes precedence.
7175
7176** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
7177constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
7178(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
7179
7180** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
7181which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
7182the current defun.
7183
7184** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
7185following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
7186
7187** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
7188and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
7189necessary).
7190
7191** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
7192if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
7193these register values no longer become completely useless.
7194If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
7195asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
7196it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
7197
7198** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
7199example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
7200be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
7201you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
7202
7203You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
7204variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
7205file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
7206revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
7207only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
7208
7209** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
7210since it applies only to the current frame.
7211
7212** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
7213file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
7214and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
7215
7216This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
7217multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
7218variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
7219tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
7220instead of just the file you are editing.
7221
7222** RefTeX mode
7223
7224RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
7225and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
7226different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
7227multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
7228turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
7229
7230C-c ( reftex-label
7231 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
7232 knows which kind of label is needed.
7233
7234C-c ) reftex-reference
7235 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
7236 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
7237
7238C-c [ reftex-citation
7239 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
7240 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
7241
7242C-c & reftex-view-crossref
7243 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
7244
7245C-c = reftex-toc
7246 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
7247 can quickly jump to every section.
7248
7249Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
7250commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
7251Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
7252reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
7253C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
7254
7255** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7256
7257*** Info documentation is now available.
7258
7259*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
7260both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
7261
7262*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
7263bibtex-user-optional-fields.
7264
7265*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
7266(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
7267
7268*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
7269entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
7270appropriate functions.
7271
7272*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
7273entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
7274
7275*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
7276been cleaned.
7277
7278*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
7279bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
7280
7281*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
7282shall be delimited.
7283
7284*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
7285bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
7286bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
7287
7288*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
7289field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
7290prefixed with `ALT'.
7291
7292*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
7293bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
7294formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
7295documentation).
7296
7297*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
7298documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
7299for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
7300
7301*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
7302comma should be inserted at end of last field.
7303
7304*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
7305alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
7306signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
7307
7308*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
7309
7310*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
7311
7312*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
7313from alien sources.
7314
7315*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
7316to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
7317crossref entries.
7318
7319*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
7320region.
7321
7322*** Added support for imenu.
7323
7324*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
7325of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
7326`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
7327`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
7328
7329*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
7330from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
7331
7332** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
7333
7334** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
7335
7336** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
7337functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
7338Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
7339as an argument.
7340
7341When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
7342and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
7343
7344** browse-url changes
7345
7346*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
7347Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
7348(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
7349non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
7350customization variables.
7351
7352*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
7353
7354*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
7355lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
7356(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
7357
7358** Changes in Ediff
7359
7360*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
7361pops up the Info file for this command.
7362
7363*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
7364the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
7365merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
7366directories).
7367
7368*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
7369and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
7370files in the same directory.
7371
7372*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
7373The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
7374related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
7375
7376** Changes in Viper
7377
7378*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
7379*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
7380 instead of vip-.
7381*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
7382*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
7383Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
7384*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
7385*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
7386*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
7387color when Viper is in insert state.
7388*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
7389Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
7390viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
7391
7392** Etags changes.
7393
7394*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
7395default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
7396Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
7397variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
7398not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
7399
7400*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
7401
7402*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
7403constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
7404
7405*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
7406recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
7407In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
7408
7409*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
7410C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
7411recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
7412methods and protocols.
7413
7414*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
7415.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
7416column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
7417paragraph name.
7418
7419*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
7420an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
7421at least M times and as many as N times.
7422
7423** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
7424in files has changed slightly.
7425
7426With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
7427time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
7428This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
7429with old time-stamp-format values.
7430
7431In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
7432(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
7433This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
7434reasons.
7435
7436In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
7437natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
7438fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
7439(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
7440time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
7441specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
7442
7443Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
7444case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
7445truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
7446
7447The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
7448being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
7449future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
7450recommended now will continue to work then.
7451
7452See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
7453details.
7454
7455** There are some additional major modes:
7456
7457dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
7458m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
7459meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
7460
7461** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
7462copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
7463into Emacs.
7464
7465** New Lisp packages include:
7466
7467*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
7468
7469*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
7470be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
7471
7472*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
7473
7474*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
7475in shell buffers.
7476
7477*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
7478See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
7479and `elint-defun'.
7480
7481*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
7482meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
7483ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
7484strings or comments.
7485
7486These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
7487abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
7488you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
7489insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
7490at these points.
7491
7492*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
7493can visit them by short forms of their names.
7494
7495*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
7496Emacs Lisp function at point.
7497
7498*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
7499
7500*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
7501switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
7502
7503*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
7504
7505*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
7506
7507*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
7508
7509*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
7510from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
7511
7512*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
7513You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
7514inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
7515original place after inserting the copy.
7516
7517*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
7518on the buffer.
7519
7520You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
7521velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
7522(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
7523
7524Enable mouse-drag with:
7525 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
7526-or-
7527 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
7528
7529*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
7530mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
7531
7532*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
7533It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
7534
7535*** ogonek
7536
7537The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
7538Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
7539platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
7540TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
7541ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
7542prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
7543instance) and vice versa.
7544
7545To use this package load it using
7546 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
7547Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
7548 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
7549 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
7550The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
7551ways of customization in `.emacs'.
7552
7553*** Interface to ph.
7554
7555Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
7556
7557The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
7558services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
7559these servers.
7560
7561*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
7562
7563*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
7564You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
7565while the real cursor does not move.
7566
7567*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
7568for visiting your favorite web sites.
7569
7570*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
7571so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
7572
7573** movemail change
7574
7575Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
7576mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
7577supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
7578user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
7579
7580This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
7581\f
7582* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
7583
7584** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
7585
7586Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
7587end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
7588Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
7589file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
7590file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
7591
7592To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
7593C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
7594coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
7595specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
7596LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
7597save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
7598\f
7599* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
7600
7601** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
7602Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
7603vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
7604Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
7605
7606** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
7607to start with w32- instead of win32-.
7608
7609In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
7610don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
7611"win".
7612
7613** Basic Lisp changes
7614
7615*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
7616evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
7617
7618*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
7619be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
7620or by the user.
7621
7622The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
7623
7624*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
7625
7626(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
7627(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
7628
7629*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
7630usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
7631its argument.
7632
7633*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
7634
7635*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
7636
7637*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
7638
7639*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
7640error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
7641include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
7642`format' function.
7643
7644*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
7645or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
7646whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
7647
7648*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
7649either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
7650adding one of these suffixes.
7651
7652*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
7653which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
7654If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
7655
7656We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
7657because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
7658
7659*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
7660
7661*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
7662You must load the `cl' library to define it.
7663
7664*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
7665conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
7666
7667 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
7668
7669BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
7670BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
7671
7672*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
7673choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
7674restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
7675works using `save-current-buffer'.
7676
7677*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
7678write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
7679of the last form.
7680
7681*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
7682which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
7683last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
7684as the last form.
7685
7686*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
7687characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
7688matches.
7689
7690For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
7691
7692*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
7693with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
7694Then it returns that string.
7695
7696For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
7697
7698(with-output-to-string
7699 (princ "The buffer is ")
7700 (princ (buffer-name)))
7701
7702returns "The buffer is foo".
7703
7704** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
7705is non-nil.
7706
7707These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
7708buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
7709characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
7710
7711*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
7712a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
7713
7714Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
7715character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
7716Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
7717position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
7718characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
7719 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
7720
7721ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
7722Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
7723non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
7724characters".
7725
7726The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
7727through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
7728"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
7729range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
7730leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
7731
7732*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
7733(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
7734multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
7735character, which may be more than one buffer position.
7736
7737This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
7738always one buffer position, need to be changed.
7739
7740However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
7741
7742*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
7743because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
7744have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
7745the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
7746guaranteed.
7747
7748*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
7749between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
7750character).
7751
7752When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
7753
7754 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
7755 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
7756 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
7757 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
7758 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
7759
7760*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
7761
7762*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
7763`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
7764more than the number of characters.
7765
7766You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
7767it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
7768\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
7769is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
7770follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
7771newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
7772
7773*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
7774and returns a string containing those characters.
7775
7776*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
7777(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
7778counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
7779character, sref signals an error.
7780
7781*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
7782in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
7783string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7784
7785*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
7786in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
7787region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7788
7789*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
7790the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
7791to a vector of the characters in it.
7792
7793*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
7794of a string. You call it as follows:
7795
7796 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
7797
7798This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
7799STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
7800This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
7801Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
7802it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
7803
7804*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
7805if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7806
7807*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
7808if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7809
7810*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
7811to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
7812not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
7813which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
7814
7815(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
7816
7817This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
7818
7819The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
7820If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
7821are not included in the resulting value.
7822
7823The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
7824at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
7825WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
7826is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
7827
7828If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
7829place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
7830character extends across that column), then the padding character
7831PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
7832string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
7833column START-COLUMN.
7834
7835*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
7836the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
7837necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
7838difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
7839changed text, before the change.
7840
7841*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
7842sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
7843one character set for each script, not for each language.
7844
7845**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
7846
7847**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
7848
7849**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
7850set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
7851
7852**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
7853name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
7854which identify the character within that character set.
7855
7856**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
7857byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
7858opposite of split-char.
7859
7860**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
7861of all the characters between BEG and END.
7862
7863**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
7864of all the characters in a string.
7865
7866*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
7867and specifying coding systems.
7868
7869**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
7870system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
7871of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
7872(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
7873and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
7874as what to do about code conversion.)
7875
7876**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
7877name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
7878
7879**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7880for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7881except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
7882
7883Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7884which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
7885to match against a file name.
7886
7887VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7888a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7889decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7890to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7891systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7892specifies the coding system for encoding.
7893
7894If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7895or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7896
7897**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
7898the coding system to use for network sockets.
7899
7900Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7901which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
7902either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
7903service names.
7904
7905VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7906a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7907decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7908to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7909systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7910specifies the coding system for encoding.
7911
7912If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7913or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7914
7915**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7916for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7917except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
7918start the subprocess.
7919
7920**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
7921systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
7922when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
7923(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
7924to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
7925
7926**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
7927coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
7928subprocess.
7929
7930It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
7931but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
7932start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
7933connection permanently or until overridden.
7934
7935The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
7936file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
7937network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
7938coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
7939It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
7940system for one operation at a time.
7941
7942**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
7943files, subprocesses or network connections.
7944
7945**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
7946coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
7947The value is a cons cell,
7948 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
7949where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
7950the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
7951input to the subprocess.
7952
7953**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
7954change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
7955
7956** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
7957customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
7958you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
7959
7960You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
7961variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
7962information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
7963legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
7964customization.
7965
7966Thus, instead of writing
7967
7968 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
7969 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
7970
7971you would now write this:
7972
7973 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
7974 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
7975 :type 'boolean
7976 :group foo)
7977
7978The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
7979two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
7980describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
7981for a description of them.
7982
7983The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
7984should belong to. You define a new group like this:
7985
7986 (defgroup ispell nil
7987 "Spell checking using Ispell."
7988 :group 'processes)
7989
7990The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
7991group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
7992but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
7993to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
7994second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
7995
7996Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
7997package should have just one group; a more complex package should
7998have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
7999package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
8000first-level subgroups.
8001
8002** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
8003
8004This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
8005separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
8006
8007** easy-mmode
8008
8009The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
8010developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
8011only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
8012predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
8013`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
8014`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
8015
8016** Text property changes
8017
8018*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
8019text property.
8020
8021*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
8022previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
8023place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
8024functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
8025starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
8026
8027If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
8028LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
8029of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
8030position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
8031
8032*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
8033value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
8034is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
8035
8036** Changes in invisibility features
8037
8038*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
8039hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
8040is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
8041should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
8042would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
8043make the overlay visible.
8044
8045During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
8046invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
8047needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
8048which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
8049the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
8050t when it should hide it.
8051
8052*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
8053
8054Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
8055invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
8056and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
8057Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
8058manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
8059Here is an example of how to do this:
8060
8061 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
8062 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8063 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
8064 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8065
8066 ...
8067 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
8068
8069 ...
8070 ;; When done with the overlays:
8071 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8072 ;; Or respectively:
8073 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8074
8075** Changes in syntax parsing.
8076
8077*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
8078`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
8079obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
8080`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
8081
8082If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
8083is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
8084used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
8085
8086When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
8087character in the buffer is calculated thus:
8088
8089 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
8090 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
8091
8092 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
8093 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
8094 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
8095
8096 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
8097 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
8098 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
8099 determine the syntax type of the character.
8100
8101 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
8102 of the current buffer.
8103
8104*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
8105value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
8106for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
8107
8108*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
8109and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
8110only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
8111character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
8112another character with the same code (unless quoted).
8113
8114These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
8115text property.
8116
8117*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
8118arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
8119of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
8120
8121*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
8122(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
8123element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
8124nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
8125string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
8126
8127*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
8128syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
8129`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
8130
8131** Changes in face features
8132
8133*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
8134if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
8135
8136*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
8137of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
8138
8139*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
8140set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
8141
8142*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
8143set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
8144
8145*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
8146by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
8147and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
8148the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
8149overlay property).
8150
8151This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
8152arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
8153
8154** Changes in file-handling functions
8155
8156*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
8157directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
8158they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
8159is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
8160
8161This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
8162begins with ~.
8163
8164*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
8165it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
8166
8167*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
8168the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
8169
8170*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
8171as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
8172
8173*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
8174character code conversion as well as other things.
8175
8176Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
8177(formerly it did not).
8178
8179*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
8180environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
8181
8182*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
8183instead of constant strings.
8184
8185*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
8186to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
8187any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
8188
8189substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
8190in the same way as before.
8191
8192*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
8193The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
8194which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
8195
8196*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
8197error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
8198else, and returns nil.
8199
8200*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
8201directory cannot be listed.
8202
8203** Changes in minibuffer input
8204
8205*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
8206read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
8207additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
8208argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
8209ways:
8210
8211 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
8212 It is available through the history command M-n.
8213
8214*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
8215read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
8216argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
8217minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
8218enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
8219
8220In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
8221argument in this way.
8222
8223*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
8224from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
8225minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
8226
8227** Echo area features
8228
8229*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
8230echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
8231minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
8232after the echo area is cleared.
8233
8234*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
8235in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
8236
8237** Keyboard input features
8238
8239*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
8240set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
8241
8242*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
8243received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
8244by keyboard macros.
8245
8246** Frame-related changes
8247
8248*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
8249creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
8250hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
8251
8252*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
8253the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
8254has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
8255
8256*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
8257selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
8258value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
8259in the selected frame.
8260
8261*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
8262is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
8263which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
8264
8265** X Windows features
8266
8267*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
8268x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
8269x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
8270
8271*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
8272The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
8273
8274*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
8275MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
8276A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
8277
8278If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
8279it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
8280
8281** Subprocess features
8282
8283*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
8284functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
8285automatically.
8286
8287*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
8288and returns the output from the command as a string.
8289
8290*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
8291and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
8292
8293** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
8294does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
8295
8296** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
8297at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
8298goes after the other menu items.
8299
8300** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
8301of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
8302around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
8303are in use.
8304
8305The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
8306series of several changes--if that seems safe.
8307
8308Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
8309after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
8310form.
8311
8312** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
8313is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
8314but its hook is still run.
8315
8316** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
8317for errors that are handled by condition-case.
8318
8319If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
8320regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
8321useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
8322
8323This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
8324are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
8325filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
8326warned.
8327
8328** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
8329way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
8330
8331** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
8332integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
8333functions like display-time.
8334
8335** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
8336name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
8337
8338** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
8339can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
8340is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
8341
8342** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
8343if there is an error in compilation.
8344
8345** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
8346switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
8347argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
8348they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
8349
8350** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
8351Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
8352the *scratch* buffer.
8353
8354** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
8355The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
8356where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
8357e.g., in Font Lock mode.
8358
8359** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
8360and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
8361It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
8362
8363** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
8364using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
8365variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
8366and compose-mail-other-frame.
8367
8368** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
8369can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
8370full name of the specified user will be returned.
8371
8372** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
8373of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
8374where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
8375in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
8376option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
8377files at all.
8378
8379** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
8380and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
8381width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
8382the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
8383
8384For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
8385minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
8386with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
8387is how %S normally pads to two positions.
8388
8389** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
8390
8391** imenu.el changes.
8392
8393You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
8394item from menu created by imenu.
8395
8396An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
8397#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
8398select one of those items.
8399\f
8400* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
8401\f
8402* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
8403
8404** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
8405mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
8406
8407** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
8408use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
8409Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
8410\f
8411* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
8412
8413** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
8414To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
8415
8416** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
8417conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
8418matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
8419expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
8420word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
8421all caps.
8422
8423** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
8424at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
8425
8426When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
8427does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
8428as in previous Emacs versions.
8429
8430** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
8431non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
8432time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
8433frames.
8434
8435** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
8436if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
8437This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
8438Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
8439accident.
8440
8441** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
8442keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
8443It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
8444line and then executing the macro.
8445
8446This command is not new, but was never documented before.
8447
8448** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
8449(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
8450characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
8451characters.
8452
8453** Font Lock mode
8454
8455*** Font Lock support modes
8456
8457Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
8458below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
8459hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
8460to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
8461Font Lock mode is enabled.
8462
8463For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
8464
8465 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
8466
8467in your ~/.emacs.
8468
8469*** lazy-lock
8470
8471The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
8472only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
8473becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
8474Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
8475occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
8476buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
8477Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
8478
8479To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
8480
8481 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
8482
8483To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
8484
8485** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8486
8487*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
8488paren and key.
8489
8490*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
8491supported.
8492
8493** Gnus changes.
8494
8495Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
8496commands and variables have been added. There should be no
8497significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
8498previously released version, except in the message composition area.
8499
8500Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
8501between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
8502
8503*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
8504variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
8505obsolete.
8506
8507*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
8508missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
8509
8510 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
8511
8512*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
8513
8514 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
8515
8516*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
8517referred.
8518
8519*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
8520
8521 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
8522
8523*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
8524
8525 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
8526
8527*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
8528buffers.
8529
8530 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
8531
8532*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
8533
8534 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
8535
8536*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
8537
8538 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
8539
8540*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
8541
8542 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
8543
8544*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
8545is possible.
8546
8547 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
8548
8549*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
8550groups of groups.
8551
8552*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
8553
8554*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
8555batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
8556
8557*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
8558
8559*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
8560
8561*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
8562
8563 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
8564
8565*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
8566expiration times.
8567
8568*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
8569
8570*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
8571process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
8572
8573*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
8574articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
8575bound to keys on the `/' submap.
8576
8577*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
8578articles with the `*' command.
8579
8580*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
8581
8582*** Article headers can be buttonized.
8583
8584 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
8585
8586*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
8587
8588*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
8589`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
8590
8591*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
8592buffer.
8593
8594*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
8595
8596*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
8597
8598*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
8599
8600 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
8601
8602*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
8603
8604 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
8605
8606*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
8607
8608*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
8609
8610*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
8611
8612 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
8613 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
8614
8615*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
8616refetching.
8617
8618 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
8619
8620*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
8621buffer to allow easier treatment.
8622
8623*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
8624
8625*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
8626
8627 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
8628
8629*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
8630articles.
8631
8632 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
8633
8634*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
8635
8636*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
8637cited text to hide is now customizable.
8638
8639 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
8640
8641*** Boring headers can be hidden.
8642
8643 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
8644
8645*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
8646
8647*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
8648
8649The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
8650in greater detail.
8651\f
8652* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
8653
8654** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
8655second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
8656asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
8657exists.
8658
8659** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
8660as well as lists.
8661
8662** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
8663of a given keymap.
8664
8665** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
8666given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
8667keymap or nil.
8668
8669** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
8670an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
8671name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
8672menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
8673equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
8674alias.
8675\f
8676* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
8677
8678** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
8679
8680Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
8681This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
8682was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
8683far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
8684pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
8685
8686For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
8687you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
8688`http://www.vtw.org/'.
8689
8690** A note about C mode indentation customization.
8691
8692The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
8693do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
8694It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
8695much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
8696chapter of the manual for details.
8697
8698However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
8699customization variables take effect.
8700
8701** Marking with the mouse.
8702
8703When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
8704highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
8705using M-x transient-mark-mode.
8706
8707** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
8708
8709*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
8710
8711*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
8712to work on NT only and not on 95.)
8713
8714*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
8715in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
8716you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
8717application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
8718applications, these problems are significant.
8719
8720If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
8721likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
8722However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
8723will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
8724other DOS application as a subprocess.
8725
8726Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
8727You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
8728
8729If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
8730subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
8731have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
8732Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
8733separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
8734Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
8735
8736** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
8737
8738This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
8739which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
8740minibuffer contains.
8741
8742** `title' frame parameter and resource.
8743
8744The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
8745It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
8746It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
8747affects just the displayed title of the frame.
8748
8749The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
8750it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
8751and also serves as the default for the displayed title
8752when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
8753
8754** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
8755enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
8756
8757** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
8758F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
8759Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
8760
8761If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
8762menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
8763something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
8764the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
8765
8766 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
8767
8768** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
8769to replace the characters it "deletes".
8770
8771** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
8772
8773** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
8774a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
8775select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
8776It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
8777immediately after the selected one.
8778
8779This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
8780made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
8781
8782** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
8783
8784Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
8785directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
8786If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
8787Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
8788recover-session.
8789
8790You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
8791auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
8792will not work.
8793
8794Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
8795normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
8796this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
8797bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
8798now that the bug is fixed.
8799
8800** Changes to Version Control (VC)
8801
8802There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
8803when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
8804Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
8805which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
8806
8807If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
8808telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
8809VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
8810the link is visited and a warning displayed.
8811
8812** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
8813Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
8814is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
8815
8816There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
8817Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
8818enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
8819The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
8820remain normal.
8821
8822** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
8823header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
8824
8825Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
8826known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
8827offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
8828Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
8829
8830Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
8831of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
8832a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
8833name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
8834documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
8835`mail-directory-stream'.)
8836
8837** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
8838skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
8839characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
8840with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
8841
8842Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
8843- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
8844wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
8845
8846The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
8847less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
8848headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
8849Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
8850Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
8851fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
8852to a limitation in font-lock).
8853
8854External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
8855
8856** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
8857buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
8858buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
8859this example:
8860
8861 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
8862 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
8863
8864** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8865
8866*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
8867
8868*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
8869
8870*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
8871
8872*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
8873entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
8874will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
8875isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
8876(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
8877The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
8878
8879*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
8880does the same job.
8881
8882*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
8883"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
8884
8885*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
8886text.
8887
8888** Font Lock mode
8889
8890*** Global Font Lock mode
8891
8892Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
8893new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
8894font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
8895turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
8896on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
8897
8898For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
8899
8900 (global-font-lock-mode t)
8901
8902in your ~/.emacs.
8903
8904*** Local Refontification
8905
8906In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
8907However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
8908those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
8909command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
8910
8911In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
8912(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
8913current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
8914above and below point.
8915
8916With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
8917
8918** Follow mode
8919
8920Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
8921buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
8922side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
8923they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
8924split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
8925follow-mode.
8926
8927M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
8928
8929To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
8930command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
8931
8932** hide-show changes.
8933
8934The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
8935to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
8936normal hooks.
8937
8938** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
8939The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
8940
8941** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
8942recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
8943those that begin a function, record, or macro.
8944
8945** MSDOS Changes
8946
8947*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
8948Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
8949
8950*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
8951and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
8952
8953*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
8954
8955*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
8956pressing both mouse buttons.
8957
8958*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
8959restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
8960are:
8961
8962**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
8963now works.
8964
8965**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
8966
8967**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
8968implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
8969
8970**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
8971
8972**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
8973
8974**** `M-x recover-session' works.
8975
8976**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
8977
8978**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
8979\f
8980* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
8981
8982** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
8983tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
8984remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
8985this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
8986behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
8987
8988** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
8989
8990The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
8991not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
8992need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
8993be different.
8994
8995It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
8996than `system-type'.
8997
8998See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
8999
9000** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
9001now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
9002
9003** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
9004that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
9005
9006** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
9007no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
9008reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
9009
9010The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
9011to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
9012like this:
9013
9014 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
9015
9016SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
9017It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
9018becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
9019
9020REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
9021seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
9022means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
9023
9024*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
9025up if too much time passes.
9026
9027 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
9028
9029This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
9030If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
9031of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
9032form in BODY.
9033
9034*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
9035a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
9036call looks like this:
9037
9038 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
9039
9040SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
9041runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
9042timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
9043ARGS.
9044
9045Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
9046command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
9047command.
9048
9049REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
9050time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
9051does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
9052each time Emacs becomes idle.
9053
9054If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
9055idle for SECS seconds.
9056
9057*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
9058all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
9059programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
9060instead.
9061
9062*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
9063there is no answer within a certain time.
9064
9065 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
9066
9067asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
9068within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
9069Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
9070
9071** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
9072arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
9073meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
9074arguments in between are ignored.
9075
9076This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
9077the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
9078
9079** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
9080/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
9081/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
9082site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
9083version.
9084
9085It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
9086version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
9087for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
9088has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
9089and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
9090problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
9091
9092** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
9093.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
9094systems with limited file name syntax.
9095
9096Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
9097convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
9098for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
9099completions.el:
9100
9101(defvar save-completions-file-name
9102 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
9103 "*The filename to save completions to.")
9104
9105This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
9106depends on the operating system, because the definition of
9107convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
9108Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
9109MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
9110
9111** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
9112rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
9113minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
9114
9115** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
9116marker from its buffer position.
9117
9118** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
9119Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
9120The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
9121
9122** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
9123that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
9124condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
9125of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
9126matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
9127regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
9128
9129This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
9130errors that happen often during editing.
9131
9132** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
9133into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
9134puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
9135
9136** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
9137now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
9138
9139** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
9140a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
9141name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
9142to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
9143and not get-buffer-window.
9144
9145** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
9146calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
9147being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
9148
9149If you use this feature, you should set the variable
9150buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
9151property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
9152non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
9153are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
9154property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
9155over and over for the same text.
9156
9157** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
9158
9159*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
9160in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
9161
9162;; @(#) HEADER: text
9163;; $HEADER: text $
9164
9165in addition to the normal
9166
9167;; HEADER: text
9168
9169*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
9170checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
9171lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
9172
9173
a933dad1 9174\f
3787e12e 9175* For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
9176
9177----------------------------------------------------------------------
9178Copyright information:
9179
424d8b44 9180Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
9181
9182 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
9183 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
9184 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
9185 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
9186
9187 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
9188 of this document, or of portions of it,
9189 under the above conditions, provided also that they
9190 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
9191\f
9192Local variables:
9193mode: outline
9194paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
9195end: